Common use of NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES Clause in Contracts

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 8 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement, Master Agreement

AutoNDA by SimpleDocs

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment 4.1 Employees or groups of employees covered represented by this AgreementTESPA shall not bargain individually or collectively with the Board concerning any terms or provisions of the negotiations agreement except through the duly designated TESPA negotiation representatives in regular negotiation sessions. B. In any negotiations described 4.2 All meetings shall be outside the regular work hours and shall not exceed two hours unless extended by mutual agreement. All proposals shall be presented in this article, neither writing by each party shall have control over in the selection of the negotiating first meeting. 4.3 No more than five and no less than three designated representatives of the Board will meet with no more than five and no less than three designated representatives of TESPA for the purpose of negotiation. Negotiations shall be conducted in a closed session. 4.4 Each party agrees to furnish the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside with information requested, pertaining to the school districtitems for negotiations, provided the information is available. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may Requests for information shall be executed without ratification submitted in writing by the Board and the Associationspokesperson of each party. 4.5 The request for negotiations shall be in writing. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each written requests shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make submitted no later than June 15th of each year. The proposals and concessions in requested for negotiations shall be within the course scope of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationnegotiable items as prescribed by law. C. If 4.6 All items within the parties fail to reach an scope of this agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members shall be disposed of by one of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of following methods: A. Agreement on the Employer, item B. Agreement to withdraw the item C. Sending the item to impasse All items shall be released from their normal duties without loss disposed of salary when meetings no later than the first day of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted school, except by mutual agreement. F. Prior 4.7 When agreement is reached between the negotiating parties on any proposal, it shall be reduced to writing prior to the establishment adjournment of any new position in the meeting at which such agreement was reached, signed by the spokesperson of each team, and marked "Tentative Agreement". 4.8 When final total agreement is reached on the total package, it shall be submitted by TESPA to support employees for ratification. TESPA will notify the President of the Board of the results of the ratification not later than ten (10) calendar days after the final agreement has been reached by the bargaining unitparty. After ratification by TESPA, the Employer Board will be presented the agreement at the next meeting allowable by the agenda policy. Upon ratification by both parties, the written agreement shall notify be signed by the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing President of the decision to establish Board and by the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possiblePresident of TESPA. The parties may agree that terms of the position should agreement shall then be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of implemented and be binding on both parties any section of this agreement may be reopeneduntil superseded by a subsequent agreement.

Appears in 7 contracts

Samples: Negotiated Contract, Negotiated Contract, Negotiated Contract

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, It is contemplated that terms and conditions of employment provided in this Agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of employees the special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern of the parties, which have not been fully or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters be provided. The parties accordingly undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for discussion, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. Not later than April 1 of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires, the Board agrees to negotiate with the Association over a successor agreement in accordance with the procedure set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach agreement concerning teachers' salaries and all other conditions of their employment. Such negotiation may include, but not be limited to, the subjects covered by this AgreementAgreement and any other matters mutually agreed to be negotiable by the parties. Any agreement so negotiated will apply to all teachers and will be reduced to writing and signed by the Board and the Association. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and party, nor may each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that While no final Agreement between the parties may agreement shall be executed without ratification by the Board Association and the Association. The Board, the parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsnegotiation, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. D. Members E. The Board agrees that whenever the Association and the Board mutually agree to engage in contract negotiations during the school day, representatives of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall Association will be released relieved from their normal all regular duties without loss of salary when meetings pay in order to permit their participation in such meetings; provided, however, that the Association shall advise the Board, before such mutual agreement, of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursmaximum number of teachers to be so involved. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 6 contracts

Samples: Professional Negotiation Agreement, Professional Negotiation Agreement, Professional Negotiation Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) 5.1 No later than 45 days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the Association and the District shall present their initial proposals for successor contract negotiations at a public meeting of the Board. Thereafter, negotiations shall not commence until a reasonable time has elapsed after the submission of these proposals to enable the public to become informed and the public has the opportunity to express itself regarding the proposals at a public meeting of the Board. After the public has an opportunity to express itself, the District shall, at a public board meeting, adopt its initial proposals. 5.2 In the case of reopener negotiations, the Association and the District shall present their initial proposals at a public meeting of the Board. Such proposals shall be submitted no later than 45 days prior to the school year in which the parties will begin have agreed to negotiate reopeners. The public provision specified in Section 5.1 above shall be applicable for all reopener negotiations. 5.3 Unless mutually agreed otherwise by the parties, the meet-and-negotiate process shall commence no later than 15 days after the completion of the public notice requirements set forth above. 5.4 During negotiations, items tentatively agreed upon shall be reduced to writing and initialed by both parties. 5.5 Upon request, the Association shall be provided with a copy of all public budget documents and other non-privileged information relevant to the negotiations for process. The District shall respond to such requests within a reasonable period of time taking into account the availability of the requested information and the time required to prepare a response. 5.6 Within one month of ratification of this Agreement by both parties, the District shall send an electronic version of the Agreement to the Association. For the first agreement between the parties only, the District shall provide each unit member with a hard copy of the final Agreement. Also, the Agreement shall be posted on the District’s website. Any new unit member hired during the term of the Agreement covering wagesshall receive a hard copy of the Agreement upon request. 5.7 During the term of the Agreement, hours, the parties may mutually agree to reopen negotiations on a limited basis to address matters such as recent legislative enactments that impact terms and conditions of employment for unit members. Negotiations on such matters may include agreement on a memorandum of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party understanding (“MOU”) which shall have control over the selection same force and effect as an express article of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtAgreement. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each Any MOU shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions considered for inclusion in the course Agreement during the next round of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 4 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior Upon mutual agreement, the parties may confer during the term of this Agreement for the purpose of discussing matters of common concern. The parties shall cooperate in scheduling such meetings at mutually convenient times. Items for a given meeting shall be limited to an agenda which will be mutually developed in advance of the expiration meeting. B. The parties acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the Board and the Association, for the life of this Agreement, each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waive the right and each agrees that the other shall not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter not specifically referred to or covered in this Agreement. However, the parties will begin negotiations shall not be precluded from mutually and voluntarily agreeing to reopen any provision of this Agreement for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions re-negotiation during the term of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articlebetween the parties, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating negotiators or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtSchool District. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each them shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiations, negotiations or bargaining subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If D. There are no understandings or agreements or past practices which are binding on either the parties fail District or the Association other than the written agreements enumerated or referred to reach an in this Agreement. No further agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of binding on either the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved District or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, until it has been placed in writing and meet with signed by both the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create District and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon either an amendment to this Agreement or as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period Letter of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beUnderstanding executed by both parties. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least It is contemplated that terms and conditions of employment provided in this Agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of the special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern of the parties, which have not been fully or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters of substantial changes in working conditions be provided. Thus, by mutual agreement, unique articles or sections may be re-negotiated. It is understood that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement but of common concern to the parties shall be subject to negotiation from time to time during the period of this Agreement upon thirty (30) days written notice by either party. B. A reasonable time prior to expiration of this Agreement, upon request of either party, negotiations will be undertaken for an agreement covering the school year. In any event, negotiations should begin not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives representative from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that While no final Agreement between the parties may agreement shall be executed without ratification by the Board Association and the Association. The Board, the parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members Within a reasonable time after the Agreement has been signed; a copy of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall Master Agreement will be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursmade available to each teacher. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during During the school year representatives of the Board and the Association bargaining committee may meet periodically for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the Agreement. These meetings are not intended to attempt bypass the grievance procedure nor shall the interaction during these meetings be the basis of a grievance. Should such a meeting result in a mutually acceptable amendment of the Agreement, then the amendment shall be subject to ratification by the Board and the Association provided that the Bargaining Committees shall be empowered to effect temporary accommodations to resolve special problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Professional Employment Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. Section 17.1 At least sixty ninety (6090) days prior to the expiration of this Agreementwritten agreement, the parties will likewise begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, and terms and conditions of employment of employees covered for para educators employed by this Agreementthe District. B. Section 17.2 In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall will have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its or bargaining representatives from within or outside the school districtDistrict. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and by the membership of the Association. The However, the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. The parties will deal with the selected representatives of each, not with individuals. C. Section 17.3 The Association and the District agree there will be no reprisals, subtle or otherwise, as a result of participation in Avondale collective bargaining negotiations. Section 17.4 If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members Section 17.5 The Association and the District acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity, are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the District and the Association for the life of this Agreement each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waives the right and each agrees that the other will not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter referred to or covered by this Agreement, even though such subject or matter may not have been within the knowledge and contemplation of either or both of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of parties at the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourstime they negotiated or signed this Agreement. E. Section 17.6 The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics request of either party they will remain on commence negotiation to modify or change this agreement as may be required or desirable because of negative financial changes impacting Avondale School District, through enrollment, the agendas until resolved School Code or until deleted by mutual agreementeffects of State and federal laws or other unforeseen major negative impacts. F. Prior to Section 17.7 This Agreement supersedes and cancels all previous Agreements, verbally or written, or based on alleged past practices between the establishment of any new position in District and the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated actionAssociation, and meet with constitutes the Association to negotiate workload for entire agreement between the positionparties. This provision does Any amendment or agreement supplemental hereto will not preclude the Employer’s ability to create be binding on either party unless executed in writing by each party and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beattached hereto. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to This Agreement incorporates the expiration entire understanding of the parties on all issues which were or could have been the subject of negotiation. During the term of this Agreement, neither party will be required to negotiate with respect to any such matter, whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and at the time they negotiated or signed this Agreement. All conditions of employment and general working conditions shall be maintained at not less than the highest minimum standards in effect in the district at the time this Agreement is signed, provided that such conditions shall be improved for the benefit of employees covered teachers as required by the expressed provisions of this Agreement. B. Beginning not later than March 1 of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires, the Caro Education Association and the Board agree to negotiate over a Successor Agreement in accordance with the procedures set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach Agreement concerning teachers' salaries, school calendar and all other conditions of their employment. Any Agreement so negotiated shall apply to all teachers and shall be reduced to writing and signed by the Board and the Caro Education Association. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations of bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach negotiations described in this Article have reached an agreement impasse, upon expiration of this contract, the procedure described in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees Michigan Public Acts of the Employer, shall 1965 will be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursfollowed. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during All Agreements are tentative until final Agreement is reached on the school year to attempt to resolve problemscomplete contract. The topics for these meetings Tentative Agreements shall be established duplicated, dated and initialed by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementchairperson of each party. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer Each party shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload have its chief negotiator present for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a each meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent Each party may keep its own minutes of both the negotiating proceedings. H. Either party may caucus at any time. I. The parties any section to this Agreement will notify each other, in writing, of names of those who are to represent them in the administration of this agreement may be reopenedAgreement and those who have the authority to negotiate for them when that is appropriate.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Professional Negotiations Agreement, Professional Negotiations Agreement, Professional Negotiations Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At Renegotiation of the Agreement shall be commenced at least sixty three (603) days months prior to the expiration of this the current Agreement. Such negotiations shall include, but not limited to, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees subjects covered by this Agreement. B. In Agreement and any negotiations described in this article, neither party other matters mutually agreed to be negotiable by the parties. Any Agreement shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party be reduced to writing and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification signed by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If B. The Board agrees that Association members, a maximum of four (4) Officers, two(2) Family Support Specialists and two (2) JROTC engaged during the parties fail to reach an agreement school day in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members official new contract negotiations on behalf of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees Association with the Board during the term of the Employerthis Agreement, shall be entitled to released from their normal duties time without loss of salary when provided the Association agrees to meet for purposes of negotiations on off-duty time at least to the same extent as on duty released time (i.e., time will be split equally between off duty time and on duty time). If the Association fails to reimburse the District, each released employee will forfeit only the MPSERS service credit for the time the employee was released and there was no reimbursement by the Association. C. During negotiations or for the purpose of assisting the Association in developing accurate, informed and constructive proposals concerning the rates of pay, wages, hours of work and other conditions of employment for Bargaining Unit employees, the Board shall provide the Association with documents relating to financial resources, budgetary requirements and allocations and any other related information which is presented to any regular and/or special meetings called by the Board to conduct official business or to any other governmental body. D. If the negotiations described in this section (A. above) have reached an impasse the procedure described in Act 379 of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursMichigan Public Acts of 1965 will be followed. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during This Agreement incorporates the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established Agreement reached by the group parties on all agreed issues, which were subjects of negotiation. During the term of this Agreement, neither party will be required to negotiate with respect to any such matter whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the parties at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved time they negotiated or until deleted by mutual agreementsigned this Agreement. F. Prior to This Agreement may be altered, changed, added to, deleted from or modified only through the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unitvoluntary, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of the parties, in writing, and signed by both parties any section of as an amendment to this agreement may be reopenedAgreement.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin SUBJECT OF NEGOTIATIONS: The subjects for negotiations for a new Agreement covering shall be wages, hours, benefit provisions and the terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither employment. REPRESENTATION: Representation at negotiation meetings shall be limited to nine (9) representatives each for the Board and the Union. Neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating other party's team. Only those persons designated as representatives shall attend negotiation meetings, unless the parties otherwise agree. The chief negotiator for each side must be in attendance at all meetings. REQUEST FOR NEGOTIATIONS: Either party may, by letter, initiate negotiations for a successor agreement not more than one hundred twenty (120) calendar days nor less than ninety (90) calendar days in advance of the other expiration date of this agreement. At that time the party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside initiating negotiations shall notify the school district. It is recognized State Employment Relations Board (SERB) that no final Agreement between the procedures set forth in this Article shall govern the parties may and shall supersede those established in Ohio Revised Code Section 4117. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a request for negotiations an initial meeting will be executed without ratification by held at which both parties shall consider use of interest based bargaining. Should the Board parties agree to use interest based bargaining, participants will be trained and the Associationground rules will be established. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail do not agree to reach an interest based bargaining, the parties shall submit in writing their proposals at the first negotiating meeting which shall be held no later than fourteen (14) days after the initial meeting. Thereafter, additional items shall not be submitted unless both parties consent thereto. Each proposal submitted by either party shall specify in detail that to which agreement in any such negotiationsis sought and which, if agreed to by the other party, would constitute the whole agreement between the parties. Negotiation meetings shall be scheduled at the request of the parties, and, until negotiations are concluded, either party may invoke request, at each meeting, a decision on the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members date, time, and place of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, subsequent meeting. Meetings shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the reasonable times, places, and intervals in order to avoid conflict with school year to attempt to resolve problemsand employment schedules. The topics for these Negotiation meetings shall be established closed to the press and the public. Neither of the parties shall discuss either the content or the progress of negotiations with anyone from the press or the electronic media. All communications with the press or other media shall be in the form of releases or statements concurred in by both parties. Either party may recess for caucuses of reasonable length at any time. ITEM AGREEMENT: Tentative agreement on negotiation items shall be reduced to writing and initialed by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possiblerepresentatives of each party. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual Such initialing shall not be construed as final agreement. F. Prior . When final agreement is reached through negotiations, said agreement shall be reduced to writing and submitted to the establishment personnel represented by the Union for approval. Upon approval of any new position in the bargaining unitagreement by the Union, the Employer agreement shall notify be submitted to the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload Board for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positionsapproval. If approved by the timing Union and the Board, the agreement shall then be signed on behalf of the decision to establish parties and shall be adopted in resolution form by the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beBoard. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior 12.1 Not later than May 1 in the year the contract is to the expiration of this Agreementexpire, the parties will SESE Board agrees to begin negotiations for with the Association over a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any successor agreement. During these negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the SESE Board and the AssociationAssociation shall meet at reasonable times and confer in good faith with respect to wages, hours and working conditions. They shall present relevant data, exchange points of view, and make proposals and counterproposals. Each party shall within a reasonable time make available to the other, upon request, information within its possession which is not privileged under law and is relevant to the subject under discussion. Either party may, if it so desires, utilize the services of outside consultants and may call upon professional and lay representatives to assist in negotiations. 12.2 Each party shall select its own representatives. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall be clothed with will have all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. 12.3 When negotiations are conducted during regular working hours, release time shall be provided without penalty for the Association’s negotiating committee members, with the SESE Board’s permission. 12.4 If after a reasonable period of negotiation, and within 15 days of the scheduled start of the school term in the District in which the Central Office is located, the parties fail have failed to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsagreement, either party may invoke notify the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members other that an impasse exists and call for the assistance of a mediator. When impasse has been declared, the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of parties shall jointly request that a mediator be appointed by the Employer, Federal Mediation and Conciliation Services. A request by one party shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. deemed a joint request. The parties hereby agree that their Teams mediator shall meet at least quarterly during the school year mutually agreeable times and places whether jointly or separately and take such steps as he/she deems appropriate to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual bring about an agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer 12.5 There shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing be two signed copies of the decision to establish final Agreement. One copy shall be retained by the position precludes such a meeting, SESE Board and one by the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beAssociation. G. By mutual consent of 12.6 This Agreement shall not be modified in whole or in part by the parties except by an instrument in writing, duly executed by both parties any section of this agreement may be reopenedparties.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. It is contemplated that terms and conditions of employment provided in this agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of the special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern to the parties which have not been fully or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters be provided. The parties accordingly undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for discussion, furnishing information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. Agreements reached shall be reduced to writing and shall be countersigned by the MFSA President and Superintendent. B. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration termination of this Agreement, the parties upon written request of either party, negotiations will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementbe undertaken. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that While no final Agreement between the parties may agreement shall be executed without ratification by the Board and MFSA, the Association. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree A reasonable time prior to expiration of the Agreement either party may give written notice to the other of its desire to negotiate a new agreement and meetings for that their Teams shall meet purpose will begin at least quarterly during a time mutually agreeable to the school year to attempt to resolve problemsparties. The topics for these meetings Provided, however, that nothing in this paragraph or elsewhere in this Agreement shall be established construed to require the Board to commit to unfair labor practice or otherwise violate the law by any improper recognition of or support or assistance to the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementMFSA. F. Prior The Board shall make available to the establishment of any new position MFSA upon its request such statistics and financial information, related to the Monroe Public Schools and in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing possession of the decision Board, but not readily available to establish the position precludes MFSA from other sources, as are necessary for negotiation of collective bargaining agreements. It is understood that this shall not be construed to require the Board to compile information and statistics not already available, but the MFSA shall have the right to examine such records and files as may be necessary to provide the necessary information provided that it shall be done on other than duty hours. However, whenever examination of records and files is required to compile information and statistics as requested by MFSA, such examination shall be accomplished by a meeting, the Employer work force consisting of an equal number of Board and MFSA representatives. Such examination shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what accomplished at a reasonable workload might betime upon reasonable notice and at a reasonable cost. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior During the negotiations leading up to the expiration of this Agreement, each party had the parties right to make proposals and bargain on all bargainable matters. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the parties. During its life, each party therefore agrees that the other will begin negotiations not be required to engage in further bargaining on any matter, whether covered herein or not, except for matters which are subject to the Professional Grievance Procedure. Matters of concern may be discussed through the ongoing collaborative bargaining process and any agreement which results may become a new part of this Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions by mutual agreement of employment of employees covered by this Agreementthe parties. B. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives or bargaining representative of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that the representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make and consider proposals and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. There shall be three (3) signed copies for purposes of record, one (1) to be retained by the Board, one (1) by the Association, and one (1) by the Superintendent. A copy of this Agreement shall be provided (print or electronic) to all teachers. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members E. A teacher engaged during the school day in negotiating on behalf of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees Association with any representative of the EmployerBoard or participating in any professional negotiation, including arbitration, shall be released from their normal regular duties without loss of salary or benefits when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly such negotiation or arbitration is held during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group day at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on request of the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementBoard. F. Prior to If during the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section duration of this agreement may contract, district per pupil revenues increase or decrease by three percent (3%) or more, based on the prior year, financial terms shall be reopenedre-opened for negotiation.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty Anytime after March 31st of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires either party may make a request to begin negotiations upon a successor agreement. Not later than thirty (6030) days following written notification of the request by one party upon the other, the initial meeting shall take place. This shall not prohibit the parties from mutually agreeing to enter into negotiations prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this AgreementMarch 31st. B. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If It is recognized that no final agreement between the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke be executed without ratification by the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedBoard and by the Association. D. Members In order that students may obtain the full benefits of their instruction, it is agreed that all negotiations on behalf of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees Association with any representation of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working Board should take place after regular school hours. E. The minutes of each meeting will be kept by the respective sides for their own files. F. Articles negotiated will be "pending tentative agreement" at each session, and at the beginning of the next negotiation session these Articles will have been typed and reviewed by both parties hereby before "tentative agreement" is reached. If these Articles are acceptable, both Chief Negotiators will sign two (2) copies, one (1) for the Board and one (1) for the Association. G. Before each negotiation session officially adjourns, the agenda, time and place for the next session shall be mutually agreed upon by the Chief Negotiators. H. In order to create the best educational environment possible and to build trust, understanding and communication, the Board and the FREA agree that their Teams to establish a labor/management committee. This committee shall be called “Partners In Education” (or the PIE Committee), and shall be active only if both the superintendent and FREA president agree in writing. Participants shall include the FREA Negotiations Team, the FREA President, the Superintendent or designee, The Business Manager, no more than two Building Principals, the Board’s Legal Representative (at superintendent’s discretion), and the MEA Uniserv Director assigned to the FREA. This committee shall meet at least quarterly during once a month, when possible, and deal with issues of mutual interest, any items impacting the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall contract must be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior subject to the establishment appropriate procedures of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beeach party. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Tentative Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement, Tentative Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty No later than one hundred and twenty (60120) days prior to the expiration of date on which this AgreementAgreement expires, the parties will begin negotiations for shall meet and negotiate on a new successor Agreement. Any such Agreement covering wages, hours, terms reached between the parties shall be in writing and conditions of employment of employees covered signed by this Agreementthem. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each Either party may select its representatives from within or utilize the services of outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority consultants to make proposals and concessions assist in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the The parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsmay discharge their respective duties by means of authorized officers, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedindividuals, representatives or committees. D. Members Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places during the regular school day. The first day of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, such meetings shall be released held within five (5) days from their normal duties without loss receipt of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursa written request from either party. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams CVPPA shall meet at least quarterly during the school year designate four (4) representatives who shall each receive release time without loss in compensation to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementattend negotiations and impasse proceedings. F. Prior The District shall furnish the CVPPA with two (2) copies of budgetary, educational and other public information upon their development that is necessary for the CVPPA to the establishment of any new position fulfill its role in the negotiation procedure as the exclusive bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might berepresentative. G. By No later than October 15 of each year during which this Contract is in effect the Board shall furnish the CVPPA with a list of placement on the salary schedule of personnel as of October 1 of that year, and, no later than the second Tuesday following commencement of the second semester, the Board shall furnish the CVPPA with a list of placement on the salary schedule of personnel who were employed as of the first day of the second semester. H. The parties agree that they have met and negotiated on all points on which they are required to do so by law and that the Contract of Agreement includes all agreements reached for purposes of inclusion in a Contract of Agreement for the period for which this Contract shall be effective and that without mutual consent agreement of both the parties any section no further items shall be suggested on which meeting or negotiating is mandatory during the lifetime of this agreement may be reopenedContract of Agreement.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. The Board agrees to participate in good faith negotiations with the duly designated representative of the Association. The Board and the Association agree that it is their responsibility to negotiate in good faith. Prior to the time set for entering into the process of negotiations, the Board, through the Superintendent, and the Association, through its President, shall each designate in writing the names of not more than five (5) persons who shall serve on their respective negotiating teams and be responsible for negotiations pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement. Each party shall also designate the person on their team who will be the chairman or chief negotiator. If either party finds it necessary to change members of the team during negotiations, they shall so inform the other party in writing. In the interest of providing a situation whereby maximum progress can be made during negotiations, each party agrees to keep changes as minimal as possible. To facilitate the orderly process of negotiations, either party may employ legal counsel or any state or national association representative of their choosing for consultative purposes during negotiations sessions. Further, each party may have professional employees of the District present during negotiation sessions for consultative purposes. However, not more than three (3) consultants per party, both legal and professional, may be present in a given negotiations session. At least sixty (60) days the beginning of each negotiating year the parties may mutually agree that sessions may or may not be recorded. The agreement shall remain in effect until both parties ratify the entire package. Negotiations will only be conducted in regular negotiation sessions at times, dates, and places mutually agreed upon by the parties. The time, date, place, and agenda will be set by mutual agreement of the parties prior to the expiration close of this Agreementeach negotiation session. Negotiation sessions shall be scheduled at times which will not interfere with the teacher workday and the educational programs of the District. Both parties agree that it is their mutual responsibility to confer upon their respective representatives the necessary power and authority to make proposals, to consider proposals and counter proposals in the course of negotiations, and to reach tentative agreements which shall be presented respectively to the Board and Association for ratification. The Board and the Association may discharge their respective duties by means of authorized officers, individuals, representatives, or committees, provided that the Board shall not select a teacher, herein defined, as its representative. Between March 1 and March 31 of each year, either the Association or the Board shall submit a written request for negotiations to commence to the other party, if it desires there to be negotiations for that year. If no such request is made during the time period above, negotiations will not take place for the ensuing year, and all previous negotiated items shall remain in force. If a request to negotiate is initiated by either party, then a meeting shall be held on May 15, or a mutually agreeable date, to exchange proposals. Subsequent proposals may only be submitted upon mutual agreement of the parties. All items shall be disposed of by one of the following methods: a) Agreement on the item; b) Sending the item to impasse; or c) Agreement to withdraw the item. During negotiations, agreed-upon proposals shall be prepared for the Board and the Association and signed prior to the adjournment of the meeting at which such agreement was reached. When the Association and Board reach tentative agreement on all matters being negotiated, the items will be reduced to writing and shall be submitted to the membership of the Association for ratification. Following Association ratification, the Agreements shall be presented to the Board for approval. The Association will have access to information affecting professional services. No special reports will be prepared beyond those required by the Board or the State Department of Education. Either team may, if it so desires, utilize the services of outside consultants and call upon professional and lay representatives to assist in the negotiations preparation. Negotiations shall be conducted in closed sessions unless both parties will begin negotiations agree to the contrary. Either party may, if it so desires, request caucuses of reasonable length during each negotiation session. Both parties agree to keep elapsed time of the caucus to a minimum. Communications between the Association and the Board, which call for a new Agreement covering wagesreply, hoursshall not be made available to the news media before a reply has been received or a refusal to reply has been clearly indicated. A period of five (5) days from receipt of the communication shall be granted for a reply. All correspondence will be made by certified mail or delivered in person to the Superintendent, terms and conditions Association President, or their designees. In the event the Superintendent feels that Board action is necessary before replying or the Association requires additional time for study before replying, an additional five (5) working days shall be granted before release to the news media. A. If negotiations are not successfully concluded by the first day of employment school, impasse shall exist. At any earlier time, either party may declare, in writing, that an impasse exists. Time limits set forth herein may be extended by mutual agreement of employees covered the parties. Upon reaching impasse, the items causing the impasse shall be referred to a three-member committee. This committee shall consist of: 1. one member who shall be selected by this Agreementthe representatives of the organization within five (5) days after the reaching of impasse; 2. one member who shall be selected by the local board of education within five (5) days after the reaching of impasse; and 3. one member, who shall be selected by the first two members, as provided by statute, within fifteen (15) days after selection of the other two members. The member selected by the first two members shall serve as chairman of the committee. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over Within five (5) days after the selection of the chairman, the representatives who have been negotiating representatives for the Board and for the Association shall meet to exchange written language on each item at impasse. The exchanged documents shall also be furnished by each party to the chairman and other members of the other party and committee. Each item being submitted to fact-finding shall show the last position taken by each party may select its representatives from within or outside negotiating team, which should thereby clarify the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement difference between the parties may parties. This list shall be executed without ratification signed by the chairman or chief negotiator of both negotiating teams and presented to the fact-finding committee. The costs for the services of the fact-finding committee, including per diem expenses, if any, and actual and necessary travel expenses shall be shared in the following manner: the Board shall assume the expenses of the representative selected by the Board, the Association shall assume the expenses of the representative selected by the Association, and the expenses of the third member shall be shared equally by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by fact-finding committee shall have authority to establish procedural rules, conduct investigations, and hold hearings during which each party to the dispute shall be clothed given opportunity to present its case with necessary power supporting evidence. All hearings by the fact-finding committee shall be conducted in closed session and authority to make proposals and concessions in no news releases shall be made by either party or the course fact-finding committee concerning the progress of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationhearings. C. The chairman shall convene the committee for fact-finding. This committee shall meet with the representatives of both parties. Within twenty (20) days after the conclusion of the fact-finding hearing, the committee shall present written recommendations to the local board and to the organization. D. If either party decides it must reject one or more of the committee's recommendations, said party must, within seven (7) days after the committee has presented its recommendations, request a meeting of the representatives who have been negotiating for the Board and for the Association. The parties fail shall meet within seven (7) days of the request, unless both parties deem it unnecessary. At such meeting, the representatives shall exchange written statements expressing each party's rationale for rejecting each recommendation found unacceptable and shall attempt to reach an agreement in clarify any such negotiationsremaining differences. The representatives shall then resume good faith effort to resolve the remaining differences; provided, after fourteen (14) days after the exchange of the written statements, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members discontinue such effort. The Board shall file a copy of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees fact-finding report with the office of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss State Superintendent of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positionsPublic Instruction. If the timing effort to resolve the differences is successful, the parties shall draft a written agreement and present the agreement to both parties for ratification, and upon ratification, such agreement shall be forwarded to the State Superintendent. If the effort to resolve differences is unsuccessful, the Board shall forward to the State Superintendent in writing its final disposition of the decision to establish negotiations impasse process within thirty (30) days of the position precludes such a meetingeffective date of implementation. In the adoption of this policy, the Employer shall meet with Board hereby declares that nothing contained herein is intended to be construed as to delegate or limit the Association powers, duties, discretions, and responsibilities of a Board of Education as soon as possibleprescribed by the Constitution and the Laws of the State of Oklahoma. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties "If any section provision(s) of this agreement may Agreement shall be reopenedfound to be contrary to law, it shall be severed from the Agreement, and all other provisions or applications of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect."

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Negotiated Agreement, Negotiated Agreement, Negotiated Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At This Agreement may be extended by mutual written consent of both parties. This Agreement constitutes the sole and entire existing Agreement between the parties and supersedes all prior practices whether oral or written and expresses all obligations imposed upon the Board and the Association. This Agreement is subject to amendment, alteration, or additions only by a subsequent written Agreement between and executed by the Board and the Association. The waiver of any breach, term, or condition of this Agreement by either party shall not constitute a precedent in the future enforcement of all its terms and conditions. B. Both parties agree to enter into negotiations on a new Agreement on wages, hours, and working conditions at least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration date of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Associationparty. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members The parties acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining; and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the Board and the Association for the life of this Agreement, each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waives the duty, and each agrees that the other shall not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter not referred to or covered in this Agreement even though such subjects or matters may not have been within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoparties at the time that they negotiated or signed this Agreement. The Board shall have the right to deal with such subjects or matters by the exercise of its management rights without prior negotiations during the life of this Agreement, who are employees unless the parties mutually agree to enter into negotiations for an amendment to this Agreement concerning such subjects or matters. E. If, at the request of the EmployerBoard, a bargaining unit member is engaged during the school day in contractual negotiations on behalf of the Association with any representative of the Board, he shall be released from their normal regular duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment and without loss of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of leave time to determine what a reasonable workload might beprovided under this Agreement. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 3 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior The parties acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining, and that the understandings and agreements arrived at the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the Employer and the Union, for the life of this Agreement, each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waive the right and agree that the other shall not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter referred to or covered in this Agreement and with respect to any subject or matter which was negotiated in the formation of this Agreement but upon which no agreement was reached; excepting that, should any bargaining subjects previously deemed illegal or prohibited be found to be mandatory by a court of competent jurisdiction after all appeals have been exhausted, the Parties will meet to bargain over the resurrected mandatory subjects. B. By the end of February preceding the expiration of this Agreementthe contract, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside of the school district. Efforts will be made by both parties to this agreement to maintain stability of membership in these negotiating groups. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the Association. The membership of the Union, but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratificationratification by both parties. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The This agreement may be altered, changed, added to, deleted from or modified only through the voluntary, mutual consent of the parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year in writing and signed by both parties as an amendment to attempt this agreement. This paragraph subject to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementprovisions of paragraph D above. F. Prior to All Letters of Understanding shall be signed by the establishment Board Representative, Union President, xxxxxxx of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, affected unit(s) and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beCouncil Staff Representative. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days Representatives of the Board and representative/representatives from the Association’s bargaining committee will meet regularly or as needed for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the contract and to resolve problems that may arise. These meetings are not intended to bypass the grievance procedure. B. Each party will submit to the other, prior to the meeting, an agenda covering what it wishes to discuss. C. All meetings between the parties will regularly be scheduled to take place as promptly as possible at times when the teachers involved are free from assigned instructional responsibilities unless otherwise mutually agreed. D. Should such a meeting result in a mutually acceptable amendment of the agreement, then the amendment shall be subject to ratification by the Board and the Association provided that the bargaining committee shall be empowered to effect tomorrow accommodations to resolve special problems. E. The Association shall designate a teacher in each school building as Association Representative (A.R.). The Association Representative may ask to meet with the principal for the purpose of reviewing the contract and to resolve problems which may arise. These meetings are not intended to bypass the grievance procedure. F. Between March 1st and March 15th, of the year of expiration of this Agreementcontract, the parties will begin negotiations shall initiate negotiation for the purpose of entering into a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement for the forthcoming year. B. G. Release time may be provided the Association’s negotiating committee to permit the parties to alternately meet both during, and after the regular school hours for the purpose of reaching a successor agreement as rapidly as possible. H. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating negotiation or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party either may select its representatives from within or outside of the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to This agreement incorporates the expiration understanding of the parties on all issues which were the subject of negotiation. During the term of this Agreementagreement, the parties neither party will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees be required to negotiate with respect to any matter covered by this Agreementagreement. It is agreed that matters that were not the subject of negotiations or covered by this agreement, but under the terms of Public Act 379 and of concern to both parties, shall be subject to negotiations between them (on occasion) during the period of this agreement upon the written request by either party to the other. It is further agreed, however, that by mutual written agreement, any subject in this contract may be subject to negotiation. B. Not later than March 1st of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires, the BOARD agrees to negotiate with the ASSOCIATION over a Successor Agreement in accordance with the procedure set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach agreement concerning Administrators’ salaries and all other conditions of their employment. Such negotiations will include, but not be limited to, the subjects covered by this Agreement and any other matters within the jurisdiction of Public Act 379. Any agreement so negotiated will apply to all Administrators in the bargaining unit and will be reduced to writing and signed by the BOARD and the ASSOCIATION. C. During negotiation, the BOARD and the ASSOCIATION will present relevant data, exchange points of view and make proposals and counter proposals. As of the time such information is made available to the BOARD, the BOARD will make available to the ASSOCIATION materials relating to budgetary proposals and all pertinent records of the Xxxxx Park School System at the written request of the ASSOCIATION. Records of the BOARD will not be removed from the BOARD’S offices. Either party may, if it so desires, utilize the services of consultants to assist in the negotiations. D. If the negotiations described in Section A have reached an impasse, the procedure described in current Michigan law will be followed. E. The ASSOCIATION recognizes that strikes (as defined by current Michigan law) by school employees are contrary to law and public policy. The BOARD and the ASSOCIATION subscribe to the principle, to the degree possible, that differences shall be resolved by appropriate and peaceful means. F. In any negotiations described in this articlebetween ASSOCIATION and BOARD, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party. Each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized understood that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority vote of the Board BOARD and by a majority vote of the Association. The membership of the ASSOCIATION; but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all the necessary power powers and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiation, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior It shall specifically be unnecessary for any party to negotiate or bargain upon any area covered or not covered by the expiration terms of this Agreement. In all such instances, no new area shall be bargained or negotiated upon, until this Agreement shall have been lawfully terminated or has expired, or until there shall be mutual written agreement by and between the parties. B. In the event the salary schedule is reopened for negotiations by either party, as provided in Article II of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations promptly negotiate for a new Agreement the purpose of reaching an agreement covering wages, hours, terms terms, and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. The Board, through its authorized representative, may employ teachers to fill vacancies for the subsequent school year under the provisions of the Master Agreement in force. However, teachers so hired will be subject to the Master Agreement approved subsequent to the date of employment. D. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither each party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its negotiation or bargaining representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge pledged that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. E. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved Michigan Employment Relations Commission (MERC) or until deleted by mutual agreementtake any other lawful measure it may deem necessary. F. Prior to the establishment Letters of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association intent to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does shall be delivered not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing later than March 1 of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of calendar year in which this agreement may be reopenedexpires.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Teachers' Negotiated Agreement, Teachers’ Negotiated Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty 3.1 The parties shall commence bargaining for a successor Agreement no earlier than April 15 unless otherwise agreed to by the parties. 3.2 It is agreed that the parties will jointly request the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service (60FMCS) days if either party to this Agreement declares impasse. Should FMCS be unavailable, the parties may commence discussion as to a replacement. 3.3 During negotiations, tentatively agreed upon materials shall be prepared by the Board of Education for the Board and the Association and signed prior to the expiration adjournment of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms meeting at which such agreement was reached or shall be presented as the first item of business at the next meeting. Any tentative agreement is considered tentative until ratification by the Association and conditions adoption by the Board of employment of employees covered by this AgreementEducation. B. In 3.4 It is the mutual responsibility of both the Board and the Association to confer upon their representatives the necessary power and authority to make and discuss proposals, make counterproposals in the course of negotiations, and to reach common concerns; provided however, such authority shall not be construed as acceptance, tentative or otherwise, of any negotiations described in this article, neither such proposal by the Board. Either party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives may request of the other party to substantiate any statistics and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtrequests presented as exhibits. It is recognized agreed that no final Agreement between mutual sharing of information available will be the general policy under which both parties may operate. Either party will be executed without allowed a reasonable time to examine exhibits or requests presented and to record and prepare its own information or requests. A request for fact gathering shall be at the expense of the party making the request. 3.5 When the Association and Board reach tentative agreement on all matters being negotiated, the items will be reduced to one document and shall be submitted to the membership of the Association for ratification and to the Board for official approval. 3.6 The costs, if any, for the mediator shall be equally shared by the Board and the Association. . 3.7 The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power Pontiac High School Staff Association hereby agrees not to strike, or engage in or support or encourage any concerted refusal to render full and authority to make proposals and concessions complete services in the course of negotiations, subject only School District or to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement engage in or support any activity whatsoever which would disrupt in any such negotiations, either party may invoke manner the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members operation of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly school during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual term of this agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement, or those covered by this Agreement and of common concern, shall be subject to professional negotiations during the period of this Agreement upon written notice to the other party. Within sixty days, the parties shall undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. In the event the salary schedule is reopened for negotiations, by either party, as provided in Article IV of this Agreement, the parties will promptly negotiate for the purpose of reaching an agreement upon a revised salary schedule. C. At least sixty (60) one hundred and twenty days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. D. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives or bargaining representative of the other party and each party may select its representatives representative from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties Board and the P.T.S. may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board and by a majority of the membership of the P.T.S., but the Board and the Association. The parties P.T.S. mutually pledge that representatives the representative selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. E. If the parties Board and the P.T.S. fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke enter into the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation process of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior 1. If either party wishes to the expiration of negotiate changes in this Agreement, it shall notify the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions other party in writing in the month of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection March of the negotiating representatives year in which the Agreement expires. The request shall be in the form of a Notice to Negotiate filed with a representative of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtState Employment Relations Board. It is recognized that no final Agreement between At the initial meeting, the parties shall exchange an initial proposal which shall contain all items to be negotiated. After the initial meeting, no new items may be executed without ratification added to the agenda by the Board and the Associationeither party, unless by mutual agreement. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall All meeting dates will be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted set by mutual agreement. F. 2. Meetings shall be scheduled so as not to interfere with normal work schedule of employees. If meetings are requested by the Xxxxxxx Xxxxx School Board during normal working hours, the employee will be paid his/her regular daily wages. 3. Prior to and during the establishment period of any new position in the bargaining unitnegotiations, the Employer shall notify Board of Education and O.A.PS.E. Local 555 agree to provide to each other upon request prior to release all regularly and routinely prepared public information concerning the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possibleissue(s) under negotiation. 4. The parties may agree that shall meet at times and places agreed upon at the position should beginning of the prior meeting. Length of meeting as well as times and places of the meetings as well as times and places of the following meetings shall be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period agreed upon at the onset of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beeach session. All meetings shall be held in executive session. G. By 5. Upon request of either party, the negotiation meeting shall be recessed to permit the requesting party thirty (30) minutes in which to caucus in privacy. A caucus shall be extended upon the request of either party. 6. News releases up until the declaration of impasse shall be made only by mutual consent agreement as to when, how, and the content of releases. If impasse is declared, either party may release information to the media. 7. As negotiated items are agreed upon, they shall be reduced to writing and initialed by the chief negotiator of each party. Such initialing shall be construed as tentative agreement by both parties on that item or issue, subject to finalization by both negotiation teams, by ratification by the membership of the Union, and by ratification by the Board. 8. No action to coerce, censor, or penalize any section participant in negotiations because of this agreement may such participation shall be reopenedmade or implied by any negotiator or member or either party so represented. Both sides agree to conduct themselves in a professional and non-personal manner.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At The parties acknowledge that during negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to all proper subjects of collective bargaining and that all subjects have been discussed and negotiated upon, and the agreements contained in this Contract were arrived at after the free exercise of such rights and opportunities. The Board of Education and Association agree to mutually resolve items of common concern not covered by this Agreement. B. A Review Committee shall be established. It shall be made up of at least sixty three (603) members of the W.H.E.A. and at least three (3) members representing the Board of Education. They shall meet at least four times per year and any additional meetings as needed. The first meeting shall be the second Tuesday in October. Additional meetings for the year will be scheduled at that first meeting. C. Approximately one hundred twenty (120) days prior to the expiration date of this AgreementContract, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement Contract covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. D. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement Contract between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Associationboth parties. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all the necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members ratification of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursentire Master Contract. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams This Contract shall meet at least quarterly during supersede any rules, regulations or practices of the school year Board which shall be contrary to attempt or inconsistent with its terms. All individual teacher contracts shall be made expressly subject to resolve problemsthe terms of this Contract. The topics for these meetings provisions of this Contract shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, incorporated into and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing considered part of the decision to establish established policies of the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beBoard. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior 4.1 Not later than the end of the school year in which this Agreement expires, the Association shall present their initial proposal to the expiration Assistant Superintendent of this AgreementHR. Upon completion of the public notice procedures, the parties will meet within ten (10) workdays and begin negotiations for of a new Agreement covering wagessubsequent contract. Any agreement reached shall be reduced to writing and signed by both parties, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementif so requested. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties 4.1.1 This timeline may be executed without ratification altered by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties. 4.2 Either party may utilize the service of outside consultants at its own expense, provided the other party is given five (5) workdays notice. 4.3 The District and Association may discharge their respective duties required by this Agreement by means of authorized officers, individual representatives, or committees. 4.4 Negotiations shall take place at times and places agreeable to the parties. 4.5 The District and Association shall each designate up to (6) representatives, not including a recorder and outside representation for purposes of official meetings and negotiating sessions, and shall notify each other of the bargaining team membership. No official meetings between the parties shall start unless a majority of each group of representatives is present. MUTA shall reimburse the District for excess substitute cost when the number of MUTA negotiators requiring substitutes exceeds five (5). 4.6 Negotiating sessions shall normally be held on workdays except during the last week of any section grading period at which time no release time shall be granted. 4.7 It is understood that full day substitutes will be hired on days of this agreement may negotiations. 4.8 Release time will be reopenedused only for negotiations or activities directly related to the duties of a classroom teacher. 4.9 MUTA and the District are responsible for their own minutes. If the interest based negotiation process is used, then joint minutes shall be taken in accordance with procedures agreed upon by the parties. 4.9.1 Said minutes shall be the official record of negotiations for both the Association and the District. Said notes shall be given to the Association’s Bargaining Chair within seven (7) work days of the negotiations meeting. 4.9.2 Should the Association believe a discrepancy exists in the minutes, XXXX’s Chief Negotiator and the Assistant Superintendent of HR will meet within ten (10) days to clarify the discrepancy.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees teachers employed by the Board; with respect to policies and procedures covered by this AgreementAgreement which are proper subjects under the law, for professional negotiations, the parties will undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any negotiable matters during this sixty (60) day period and until a new agreement is reached. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party. Each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power make proposals, consider proposals, and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members If counsel is to be used by either party in negotiations, said party will give five (5) days notice prior to the meeting in which legal counsel is to be used. Meetings may be canceled by notification to the other party by the chairman of the Association’s either negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, committee. Negotiation meetings shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of closed to the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourspress. E. The Both parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly recognize the desirability of continuous and uninterrupted operation of the instructional program during the normal school year and the avoidance of disputes which threaten to attempt to resolve problemsinterfere with such operations. The topics for these meetings shall be established Association accordingly agrees that it will not, during the period of this Agreement, directly or indirectly engage in or assist in any strike, as said term is defined by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementPublic Employment Relations Act. F. Prior This Agreement shall supersede any rules, regulations or practices of the Board which shall be contrary to or inconsistent with its terms. It shall likewise supersede any contrary or inconsistent terms contained in any individual teacher contracts heretofore in effect. All future individual teacher contracts shall be made expressly subject to the establishment terms of this Agreement or any new position in succeeding Agreement covering the bargaining unit, same school year as the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beteacher contracts. G. By mutual consent of both parties If any section provision of this agreement may Agreement or any application of the Agreement to any employee or group of employees shall be reopenedfound contrary to law, then such provision or application shall not be deemed valid and subsisting except to the extent permitted by law, but all other provisions or applications shall continue in full force and effect.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. Section 17.1 At least sixty ninety (6090) days prior to the expiration of this Agreementwritten agreement, the parties will likewise begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, and terms and conditions of employment of employees covered for para educators employed by this Agreementthe District. B. Section 17.2 In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall will have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its or bargaining representatives from within or outside the school districtDistrict. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and by the membership of the Association. The However, the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. The parties will deal with the selected representatives of each, not with individuals. C. Section 17.3 The Association and the District agree there will be no reprisals, subtle or otherwise, as a result of participation in Avondale collective bargaining negotiations. Section 17.4 If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members Section 17.5 The Association and the District acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity, are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the District and the Association for the life of this Agreement each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waives the right and each agrees that the other will not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter referred to or covered by this Agreement, even though such subject or matter may not have been within the knowledge and contemplation of either or both of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of parties at the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourstime they negotiated or signed this Agreement. E. Section 17.6 The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics request of either party the y will remain on commence negotiation to modify or change this agreement as may be required or desirable because of negative financial changes impacting Avondale School District, through enrollment, the agendas until resolved School Code or until deleted by mutual agreementeffects of State and federal laws or other unforeseen major negative impacts. F. Prior to Section 17.7 This Agreement supersedes and cancels all previous Agreements, verbally or written, or based on alleged past practices between the establishment of any new position in District and the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated actionAssociation, and meet with constitutes the Association to negotiate workload for entire agreement between the positionparties. This provision does Any amendment or agreement supplemental hereto will not preclude the Employer’s ability to create be binding on either party unless executed in writing by each part y and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beattached hereto. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement but of common concern to the parties shall, upon written request, be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this Agreement provided there is mutual consent to enter into such negotiations. B. In the event the salary schedule is reopened by mutual consent for negotiation as provided in Section V of the Agreement, the parties will promptly negotiate for the purpose of reaching an agreement upon a revised salary schedule. At least sixty (60) days prior to by May 1, of the year of the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will likewise begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleSection, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If D. The Board agrees to furnish to the parties fail Association, in response to reach an agreement in any such negotiationswritten requests, either party may invoke information concerning the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members financial resources of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretodistrict, who are employees budgetary requirements and allocations, and such other information as will assist the Association in developing intelligent, accurate, informed and constructive programs on behalf of the Employerteachers and their students, shall together with information which may be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of necessary for the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursAssociation to process any grievance or complaint. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during Association will confer with the school year Superintendent from time to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by time concerning fiscal tax programs affecting the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify District and the Association of such a contemplated actionshall, and meet whenever feasible, have the opportunity in advance to consult with the Association Board with respect thereto prior to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might begeneral publication. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior It is agreed that matters concerning wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment not specifically covered by this Agreement but of common concern to the parties shall be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this agreement upon request by either party to the other. The parties undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. By the end of February preceding the expiration of this Agreementthe contract, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of educational service employees covered employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside of the school district. Efforts will be made by both parties to this agreement to maintain stability of membership in these negotiating groups. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the Association. The membership of the Union, but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratificationratification by both parties. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The This agreement may be altered, changed, added to, deleted from or modified only through the voluntary, mutual consent of the negotiators in writing and signed by both parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year as an amendment to attempt this agreement. This paragraph subject to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementprovisions of paragraph C above. F. Prior to All Letters of Understanding shall be signed by the establishment Board Representative, Union President, xxxxxxx of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, affected unit(s) and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beCouncil Staff Representative. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least If either the Union or the Board desires to modify or amend this Agreement, they shall give written notice of such intent to the other party no earlier than ninety (90) calendar days nor later than sixty (60) calendar days prior to the expiration date of this Agreement. Such notice shall be made by certified mail with return receipt. Neither party shall be obligated to commence negotiations prior to sixty (60) calendar days before the expiration of this Agreement. Negotiation procedures between the parties shall be as follows: 1. All negotiation sessions will be held in the Board's main conference room in the Administrative Building unless the parties hereto mutually agree otherwise. 2. The Board and the Union shall select the members of their respective bargaining teams; however, each team shall be limited to no more than four (4) representatives each, of which no more than three (3) may be employees of the Board. Each team may also designate one (1) alternate team member. Once selected, the parties will begin negotiations for shall exchange a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms written list of such names. Additional persons may only be added to a team on an ad hoc basis and conditions when specific items are being discussed which require the attendance of employment such person(s) 3. The Chief Negotiator of employees covered by this Agreementeither team may permit members of such team to speak on specific issues and may appoint a substitute spokesperson when absent from all or any part of a session. B. In any negotiations described 4. Negotiation sessions shall commence at 5:00 P.M. unless otherwise mutually agreed and the date and length of each session shall be scheduled by the parties on an as-needed basis. 5. Each team shall be responsible for its own notes during negotiation session except that no mechanical recordings shall be permitted. 6. Any tentative agreement(s) reached by the parties shall be reduced in this article, neither party shall have control over writing and initialed by the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and Chief Negotiator for each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtteam as well as a duly authorized representative. It is recognized that no final Agreement between specifically understood by the parties may be executed without ratification that any such tentative agreement(s) are not final and binding until duly ratified by the Board and the AssociationUnion. The Union bargaining team shall present any such tentative agreement(s) to its membership and the Board bargaining team shall present any such tentative agreement(s) to the Board with a recommendation for ratification. 7. It is agreed that during negotiations, neither the Board nor the Union shall issue any statements or remarks to the news media unless mutually agreed to by the parties prior to its issuance. 8. A caucus may be called at any time during negotiations by the Chief Negotiator for either negotiating team. 9. Any reasonable requests for information shall be made in writing by the team so requesting. 10. Any written proposals or information submitted by one (1) bargaining team for consideration during negotiations shall be where practicable in sufficient quantity so as to provide a copy for each member of the other bargaining team. 11. The Board and the Union shall exchange their proposals at the first negotiation session. No new items may be proposed for negotiations after the first session, although either party may submit their counter proposals to initial proposals. Before negotiating economic issues, all non-economic issues should be resolved. 12. The parties agree to the following mutually pledge that representatives selected by each agreed upon and exclusive dispute settlement procedure, which shall be clothed with necessary power operate in lieu of any and authority to make proposals and concessions all dispute settlement procedures set forth in O.R.C. Chapter 4117: If, during the course period of negotiationsthirty (30) calendar days before the expiration date of the current collective bargaining agreement, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail are unable to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsagreement, then either party may invoke request mediation by seeking the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members services and assistance of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoFederal Mediation and Conciliation Service (FMCS). Such request for mediation must be in writing and signed by the party so requesting. After mediation is requested, who are employees negotiations shall be conducted using the conciliation and mediation services to the extent available through FMCS until settlement is reached between the parties or until expiration of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursAgreement whichever occurs first. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms 2-1 The Board or its designated representatives and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the WEA shall cooperatively develop procedures for the orderly conduct of professional negotiations. The first meeting should take place on or before April 1, at a mutually agreed place and time. Sometime prior to April 1, the WEA or its designated representative and the Board or its designated representative shall establish contact with each other to establish the initial time, date, and place for the first negotiations meeting. A list of issues to which discussion shall be limited shall be presented no later than the third meeting. All negotiation meetings should be held outside the regular school day unless otherwise agreed. 2-2 The Board and the WEA shall be represented at all negotiation meetings by a team of negotiators, not to exceed three members each. All negotiations shall be conducted exclusively between said teams. In addition to the said team, each team shall be authorized to admit not more that two observers at one time to such meetings. Such observers shall be without the right to speak or to otherwise comment to either party during said meetings. 2-3 The Superintendent shall make accessible to the WEA, upon reasonable request, all available relevant and each public information pertinent to the issues under negotiations. 2-4 Upon the request of either party, the negotiation meeting shall be recessed to permit the parties to caucus. 2-5 The parties may call upon consultants to assist in all negotiations. The expense of such consultants shall be borne by the party requesting them. 2-6 Once an agreement is reached between representatives of the WEA and the Board and is ratified by both parties, the agreement shall be reduced to writing and signed by the parties. 2-7 If, after a reasonable period of negotiation and within forty-five days of the first scheduled teacher attendance day of the forthcoming school year, the Board and the WEA have not reached agreement, either party may select its representatives from within or outside declare to the school districtother in writing that an impasse exists and call for a mediator. It is recognized that no final Agreement between A written request for mediation, as initiated by either party, to the parties may Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service shall be executed without ratification signed by both parties. Any costs for the mediator shall be equally shared by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationWEA. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior 4.1 Not later than the end of the school year in which this Agreement expires, the Association shall present their initial proposal to the expiration Assistant Superintendent of this AgreementHR. Upon completion of the public notice procedures, the parties will meet within ten (10) workdays and begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement.a B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties 4.1.1 This timeline may be executed without ratification altered by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties. 4.2 Either party may utilize the service of outside consultants at its own expense, provided the other party is given five (5) workdays notice. 4.3 The District and Association may discharge their respective duties required by this Agreement by means of authorized officers, individual representatives, or committees. 4.4 Negotiations shall take place at times and places agreeable to the parties. 4.5 The District and Association shall each designate up to (6) representatives, not including a recorder and outside representation for purposes of official meetings and negotiating sessions, and shall notify each other of the bargaining team membership. No official meetings between the parties shall start unless a majority of each group of representatives is present. MUTA shall reimburse the District for excess substitute cost when the number of MUTA negotiators requiring substitutes exceeds five (5). 4.6 Negotiating sessions shall normally be held on workdays except during the last week of any section grading period at which time no release time shall be granted. 4.7 It is understood that full day substitutes will be hired on days of this agreement may negotiations. 4.8 Release time will be reopenedused only for negotiations or activities directly related to the duties of a classroom teacher. 4.9 MUTA and the District are responsible for their own minutes. If the interest based negotiation process is used, then joint minutes shall be taken in accordance with procedures agreed upon by the parties. 4.9.1 Said minutes shall be the official record of negotiations for both the Association and the District. Said notes shall be given to the Association’s Bargaining Chair within seven (7) work days of the negotiations meeting. 4.9.2 Should the Association believe a discrepancy exists in the minutes, XXXX’s Chief Negotiator and the Assistant Superintendent of HR will meet within ten (10) days to clarify the discrepancy.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior It shall specifically be unnecessary for any party to negotiate or bargain upon any area covered or not covered by the expiration terms of this Agreement. In all such instances, no new area shall be bargained or negotiated upon until this Agreement shall have been lawfully terminated or has expired or until there shall be mutual written agreement by and between the parties. B. In the event the salary schedule is reopened for negotiations by either party, as provided in Article II of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations promptly negotiate for a new Agreement the purpose of reaching an agreement covering wages, hours, terms terms, and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. The Board, through its authorized representative, may employ teachers to fill vacancies for the subsequent school year under the provisions of the Master Agreement in force. However, teachers so hired will be subject to the Master Agreement approved subsequent to the date of employment. D. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither each party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its negotiation or bargaining representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. E. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved Michigan Employment Relations Commission (MERC) or until deleted by mutual agreementtake any other lawful measure it may deem necessary. F. Prior to the establishment Letters of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association intent to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does shall be delivered not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing later than Marh 1 of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of calendar year in which this agreement may be reopenedexpires.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this agreement but of common concern to the expiration parties shall be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this AgreementAgreement upon mutual consent. The parties undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information, and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. In the event the salary schedule is re-opened for negotiations by either party, if and when provided in this agreement, the parties will begin promptly negotiate for the purpose of reaching an agreement upon a revised salary schedule. In the year in which the contract will expire the parties will start the negotiations process no later than March 1, for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsnegotiation, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree recognize that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during principals, the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in Superintendent and other supervisory, administrative and executive officials are excluded from the bargaining unit. The Association agrees that it will neither take nor threaten to take any reprisals, directly or indirectly, against any such supervisory or executive officials because of any decision, actions, or statement made either personally or in the course of their official duty relative to collective bargaining, the Employer shall notify administration of this Agreement, or the educational policies of the Board. The Board and the Administration agrees that they will neither take nor threaten to take any reprisals, directly or indirectly, against the Association nor any member thereof because of such a contemplated actionany decisions, and meet with actions, or statements made either personally or in the Association course of their official duty relative to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might becollective bargaining. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days By March 1 prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will Parties shall begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, and terms and conditions of employment of employees Teachers employed by the Board. Upon mutual agreement, any Article may be opened for negotiation at any time. B. A Teacher engaged during the school day in negotiating in behalf of the Association with any representative of the Board or participating in any Grievance Procedure, including Arbitration, shall be released from regular duties without loss of salary. Such release from regular duties shall apply to negotiations scheduled or requested by the Board during the school day. C. It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement, but of common concern to the Parties, shall be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this Agreement, upon request by either Party to the other. B. D. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party Party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party Party, and each party Party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties Parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and the Association. The parties Association according to their respective procedures; but the Parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with given all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. Such representatives shall be empowered to agree to negotiations schedules and procedures. C. E. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party Party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursMichigan Employment Relations Commission (MERC) or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Professional Agreement, Professional Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. Section 18.1 At least sixty ninety (6090) days prior to the expiration of this Agreementwritten agreement, the parties will likewise begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, and terms and conditions of employment of employees covered for secretaries employed by this Agreementthe District. B. Section 18.2 In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall will have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its or bargaining representatives from within or outside the school districtDistrict. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and by the membership of the Association. The However, the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. Section 18.3 The parties will deal with the selected representatives of each, not with individuals. Section 18.4 The Association and the District agree there will be no reprisals, subtle or otherwise, as a result of participation in Avondale collective bargaining negotiations. Section 18.5 If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members Section 18.6 The Association and the District acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity, are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the District and the Association for the life of this Agreement each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waives the right and each agrees that the other will not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter referred to or covered by this Agreement, even though such subject or matter may not have been within the knowledge and contemplation of either or both of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of parties at the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourstime they negotiated or signed this Agreement. E. Section 18.7 The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the request of either party they will commence negotiation to modify or change this agreement as may be required or desirable because of changes in the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established code or other state law enacted by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementMichigan Legislature. F. Prior to Section 18.8 This Agreement supersedes and cancels all previous Agreements, verbally or written, or based on alleged past practices between the establishment of any new position in District and the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated actionAssociation, and meet with constitutes the Association to negotiate workload for entire agreement between the positionparties. This provision does Any amendment or agreement supplemental hereto will not preclude the Employer’s ability to create be binding on either party unless executed in writing by each party and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beattached hereto. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty 3.1 Each year this contract is in effect, representatives of the Parties shall meet to determine the intention of the parties to seek to modify, amend, or terminate the contract. 3.2 Either party may submit interests and reopen negotiations covering any two articles of choice in addition to Salary and Benefits annually unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. 3.3 Initial negotiations shall commence as soon as practical considering the time constraints created by providing opportunity for the community to respond to the initial proposals of the Association and the District. 3.4 Either party may utilize the services of an outside consultant. By mutual agreement between the Parties there will be no representation in negotiation meetings by outside parties such as California Teachers’ Association (60CTA) days for the Association, or legal representation for the District in negotiation meetings unless and until either party elects to reinstate representation. Upon election to reinstate outside representation, the electing party will notify the other party a minimum of 24 hours prior to the expiration first scheduled negotiation meeting at which the representative will be present. 3.5 The District and the Association may discharge their respective duties required in this agreement by means of this Agreementauthorized officers, individual representatives, or committee. 3.6 Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places during and outside the regular school day, provided that meetings shall be held within fifteen days from receipt of a written request. 3.7 The Association will be allocated release time to attend and consummate negotiations. The District agrees to provide paid release time which may be allocated between as many as five (5) and one (1) alternate, unit members designated by the Association. 3.8 The District shall make available to the Association upon written request a copy of state financial reports, budgetary information it produces for the county, and personnel information necessary for the Association to fulfill its role as exclusive bargaining agent. 3.9 Not later than November 1st, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wagesDistrict shall furnish the Association with names, hoursaddresses, terms telephone numbers, and conditions the placement of employment personnel on the certificated salary schedule as of employees covered by this AgreementOctober 1st. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement 3.10 The agreement reached between the parties may shall be executed without ratification made in writing and signed by them. 3.11 The negotiations team for the Board and Association shall be not more than five, plus one alternate bargaining unit members appointed by the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority In addition to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiationsfive-member Association team, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsAssociation may have present, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members during negotiations sessions a field representative of the California Teachers Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty one hundred fifty (60150) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms hours and conditions of employment of employees covered members in the bargaining unit employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. In any negotiations described in this articlethe Article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its or bargaining representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each side shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the State Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. D. Members The parties acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the board and Association, for the life of this Agreement, each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waives the right, and each agrees that the other shall not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter not specifically referred to or covered in this Agreement, even though such subjects or matters may not have been within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of parties at the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourstime that they negotiated or signed this Agreement. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings There shall be established three (3) officially signed copies of the final agreement for the purposes of record. One (1) retained by the group at Board, one (1) by the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on Association and one (1) by the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementSuperintendent. F. Prior Copies of this final agreement shall be supplied to the establishment of any new position all teachers in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might besystem at Board expense. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Professional Master Contract, Professional Master Contract

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. This Agreement expressly embodies all agreements written and oral between the District and the Association and is intended to cover all matters which were raised or could have been raised by either of the parties at the time of negotiations. Unless otherwise designated in this Agreement, any subject matter relating to wages, hours or working conditions of teachers which does not fall within the category of “matters which were raised or could have been raised by either of the parties at the time of negotiations” shall upon request of either party be subject to regular collective bargaining procedures. No amendment or supplement to this Agreement shall be effective or valid for any purpose whatever unless set out in writing and signed by the District and the Association. Memoranda of Understanding which have been executed by the Association President on behalf of the HEA and the Superintendent or his/her designee on behalf of the District shall continue in full force and effect for the duration of this Agreement. If both parties agree, any subject matter contained in this Agreement may be reopened for negotiations during the term of the contract. Failure of either party to so agree shall not be the subject of any grievance, complaint, objection or charge by the other party. B. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations negotiation for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe District. Provided, however, the parties may mutually agree on any other date for commencement of bargaining. It is acknowledged by the parties that such provision is for the purpose of the convenience of the parties and does not operate in derogation of any decision or rule of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. B. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither each party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may be free to select its representatives from within negotiating or outside the school districtbargaining representatives. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and a majority of the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that negotiating or bargaining representatives selected by each shall be clothed with have all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 final ratification as amendedabove noted. D. Members of The Superintendent or her/his designee(s) and the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams Association President or her/his designee(s) shall meet at least quarterly monthly (during the school year). The parties agree to meet at least periodically throughout the school year to attempt to resolve problemsmatters which may arise during the terms of this Agreement. The topics for these meetings shall be established by If no agreement is reached, the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position language contained in the current collective bargaining unitagreement shall remain in full force and effect. Should laws change during the life of this Agreement, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association parties agree to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association schedule negotiations as soon as possible. The parties may agree that possible to resolve the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beissue(s). G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Master Agreement, Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty 1. The Board’s negotiating team shall consist of four (604) days prior members [three (3) Board members and the Superintendent]. There may be two nonparticipating observers in attendance from the Board or administration. 2. DCMEA/IEA-NEA’s negotiating team shall consist of a Chief Negotiator and five members designated by the DCMEA. There may be two nonparticipating observers in attendance from the membership. 3. A quorum of the joint negotiating committee shall consist of three members of the Board team and three members of the DCMEA team. 4. Definite dates for meetings shall be agreed upon in advance. 5. Meetings shall last no longer than three (3) hours unless agreed to by both parties. 6. The Chief Negotiator of each negotiating team or designee shall be the expiration of this Agreementofficial spokesperson for the team. 7. All proposals shall be submitted in writing, the parties will begin negotiations with copies furnished for each committee member. 8. Either Chief Negotiator may call for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered caucus at any time during the negotiating session. A caucus shall last no more than thirty minutes unless agreed to by this Agreementboth parties. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association9. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by shall make every attempt to negotiate non-financial contract language before proceeding to negotiating financial issues. 10. The last item of business at each meeting shall be clothed with necessary power the establishment of a date, time, and authority place for the next meeting. If possible, a tentative agenda will be established. 11. All negotiation sessions will be kept confidential until such time that both sides mutually agree to make proposals publicly share information or until impasse. Only the Chief Negotiator of each party or designated agent shall give information to the press during negotiations. 12. All negotiated items upon which tentative agreement is reached shall be reduced to writing and concessions in initialed by the course Chief Negotiators pending precise wording and acceptance of negotiations, subject only the final contract. 13. A tentative agreement reached during the negotiation process will be presented to such ultimate the Board of Education and DCMEA membership for ratification. C. If 14. Prudence and restraint shall govern the parties fail participants of both negotiating teams in discussing proposals and information relating to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto15. Both teams, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such may effect a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing suspension of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beabove rules. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 2 contracts

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement, Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees teachers employed by the Board; with respect to policies and procedures covered by this AgreementAgreement which are proper subjects under the law, for professional negotiations, the parties will undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any negotiable matters during this sixty (60) day period and until a new agreement is reached. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party. Each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power make proposals, consider proposals, and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members If counsel is to be used by either party in negotiations, said party will give five (5) days’ notice prior to the meeting in which legal counsel is to be used. Meetings may be canceled by notification to the other party by the chairman of the Association’s either negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, committee. Negotiation meetings shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of closed to the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourspress. E. The Both parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly recognize the desirability of continuous and uninterrupted operation of the instructional program during the normal school year and the avoidance of disputes which threaten to attempt to resolve problemsinterfere with such operations. The topics for these meetings shall be established Association accordingly agrees that it will not, during the period of this Agreement, directly or indirectly engage in or assist in any strike, as said term is defined by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementPublic Employment Relations Act. F. Prior This Agreement shall supersede any rules, regulations or practices of the Board which shall be contrary to or inconsistent with its terms. It shall likewise supersede any contrary or inconsistent terms contained in any individual teacher contracts heretofore in effect. All future individual teacher contracts shall be made expressly subject to the establishment terms of this Agreement or any new position in succeeding Agreement covering the bargaining unit, same school year as the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beteacher contracts. G. By mutual consent of both parties If any section provision of this agreement may Agreement or any application of the Agreement to any employee or group of employees shall be reopenedfound contrary to law, then such provision or application shall not be deemed valid and subsisting except to the extent permitted by law, but all other provisions or applications shall continue in full force and effect.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior 2.01 Notices to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party negotiate shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of be made to the other party in the month of February of the year of expiration of the contract. A mutually accepted meeting date shall be set not more than fifteen (15) workdays following receipt of such request. 2.02 All meetings shall be mutually scheduled. Each team is responsible for its minutes or notes. 2.03 The negotiation teams shall be composed of five (5) team members each plus one OAPSE representative and each party may select its representatives from within or outside one Board representative. Consultants shall be allowed on a case by case basis and only by mutual agreement. 2.04 The procedure for the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may exchange of proposals will be executed without ratification mutually agreed upon by the OCSD Board of Education and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority Union. 2.05 Either team may recess for caucuses, not to make proposals and concessions in exceed thirty (30) minutes, at any time. 2.06 During the course of negotiations, subject only items agreed to such ultimate ratificationshall be reduced to writing and initialed by a representative of each team. Such initialing shall be tentative only. C. If the 2.07 When a deadlock is reached, after both parties fail to reach an agreement have negotiated a matter for a reasonable period of time, in any such negotiationsgood faith, either party may invoke declare an impasse. 2.08 If in the event either or both parties declare impasse, both parties agree to mutually request assistance from the office of Federal Mediation and Conciliation Services. Once having been assigned a mediator, negotiations shall continue under the direction of such mediator until such time as tentative agreement is reached or until the mediator is excused by mutual agreement of both parties. The mediator shall have no power to force agreement, modify proposals or otherwise alter the normal bargaining relationship between the parties. It is agreed that the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedset forth in this Section constitute a mutually agreed Dispute Settlement Procedure, which supersedes the procedures contained in ORC Section 4117.14. D. Members 2.09 Periodic progress reports may be presented to the membership of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoUnion and OCSD Board of Education by their respective teams. No news release or public information shall be made except by mutual agreement of both parties. 2.10 Any changes in this negotiation agreement shall be considered through the established negotiation procedures set forth in this instrument. 2.11 All negotiations shall be conducted in good faith by the OCSD Board of Education and the Union. 2.12 When an agreement is reached through negotiations, who are employees the outcome shall be reduced to writing. Both parties shall review the agreement together to determine the accuracy of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positionstranscript. If the timing Agreement is then in proper form it shall be submitted to the Union and the OCSD Board of Education for ratification and adoption. When adopted by the OCSD Board of Education and Union, the Agreement shall become part of the decision to establish official OCSD Board of Education minutes and binding on both parties. Said agreement shall be signed by the position precludes such a meeting, OCSD Board’s representative and by the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possibleUnion’s President. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.Please see item

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least Upon ratification of the Master Agreement, the Association shall not bring up matters for negotiation to the Board and the Board will not bring up matters to the Association except by written mutual consent and as provided in Sections B and L of this ARTICLE and ARTICLE XIV, Section C. B. Within one hundred twenty (120) days, but not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, and upon written notice by the Association, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleARTICLE, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its six (6) representatives and two (2) alternates from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by both parties, but the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either D. Either party may at any time invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members of E. All negotiation meetings will be held in a room(s) mutually agreed upon by the chief negotiators for the Board and Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, . F. All negotiation meetings will be closed to all persons who are employees not duly appointed representatives or alternates under this ARTICLE. Each team, with as much notice as possible may bring in consultants for the purpose of aiding in the Employernegotiation of specific proposals. G. All negotiation meetings will be set as to time, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings duration and agenda by mutual agreement of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourschief negotiators. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings H. There shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted no release of information concerning opposition proposals and/or tentative agreements, except by mutual agreement, and except to acquire technical information relative to specific proposals, and except that the chief negotiator for the Board may brief the Board and the chief negotiator for the Association may brief the members of the Association relative to progress in negotiations. However, should the parties reach impasse, this rule shall cease to operate with respect to tentative agreements and proposals on the table at that time. F. Prior I. All agreements shall be tentative pending final agreement on an entire tentative contract by the negotiating representatives for both sides. J. Each team shall have on the table at all times a set of proposals, which if agreed to by the other team along with all tentative contract agreements in effect, shall constitute an entire tentative contract. K. Notwithstanding the expiration of this Agreement, the negotiation procedures outlined in this ARTICLE shall be in effect until a successor agreement is negotiated and ratified. 0000 - 0000 Xxxxx Paid Days Weeks Worked Position A 216 44 Middle School Assistant Principal 221 45 Assistant Director of Community Education 221 45 Director, Vocational Education 221 45 Asst. Director of Curriculum and Instruction B 221 45 Associate High School Principal 216 44 Elementary Principal 221 221 45 45 Associate Director, Developmental Learning Program Director, Secondary Special Needs 221 45 Director, Federal Projects and Research C 230 46 Director of Community Education 221 45 Middle School Principal 221 221 45 45 Director, Developmental Learning Program Director of Student Services • All salary levels are based on the previous schedule Ed Specialist educational level • A $1,000 increase will be added to the establishment of any new position base for a PhD or EdD received from an accredited university 2018-2019 • To achieve parity with other bargaining groups for the 2017-2018 school year, administrators who were actively working as an administrator in the bargaining unitDistrict as of January 1, 2018, through the end of the 2017-2018 school year, and who are currently on Steps 5 – 8 of the GCAA Salary Schedule and who receive an effective or highly effective rating on their last year-end evaluation will be paid a one-time 4.13% off-schedule payment based upon each current administrator’s 2014-2015 base salary on the second pay of the 2018-2019 contract year. • Steps o Administrators currently on Steps 1 – 4 of the GCAA Salary Schedule, who receive an effective or highly effective rating on their last year-end evaluation, will receive a one-time step increase. o Administrators currently on Steps 5-8 will remain frozen. • 5% off schedule concession from the 2013-2014 and 2014-2015 GCAA Salary Schedule • One time off-schedule payment in accordance with formula provided below, to be paid by the first pay in December unless otherwise negotiated with the GCAA. It is agreed that in order to provide for the financial stability of the District so that it may continue providing a high quality educational program for students, the Employer shall notify parties intend for the Association District to establish a minimum fund balance of such 8% (eight percent), defined as the audited General Fund Equity balance of at least 8% (eight percent) of each school/fiscal year’s total revenues at the fiscal year end June 30 audit (Minimum Fund Balance). In order to achieve and maintain a contemplated actionminimum fund balance of 8%, one of the following formulas will be utilized to calculate a one-time off-schedule payment to each member of the GCAA who receives an Effective or Highly Effective rating on their last year-end evaluation, if the following conditions are met: o If the fiscal year end June 30 audit reveals an increase in fund equity in the General Fund, and meet o A minimum fund balance of 8% or greater is achieved o Salary Factor = Most recent Audited Fund Balance % of Revenues less Minimum Fund Balance % (i.e., 8%) o One-time Off-Schedule payment = 2014-15 Base Salary x Salary Factor 2019-2020 • Steps remain frozen • 5% off schedule concession from the 2013-2014 and 2014-2015 GCAA Salary Schedule • One time off-schedule payment/reduction in accordance with formula provided below, to be paid by first pay in December unless otherwise negotiated with the Association GCAA It is agreed that in order to negotiate workload provide for the positionfinancial stability of the District so that it may continue providing a high quality educational program for students, the parties intend for the District to establish a minimum fund balance of 8% (eight percent), defined as the audited General Fund Equity balance of at least 8% (eight percent) of each school/fiscal year’s total revenues at the fiscal year end June 30 audit (Minimum Fund Balance). This provision does not preclude In order to achieve and maintain a minimum fund balance of 8%, one of the Employer’s ability following formulas will be utilized to create and post positions. calculate a one-time off-schedule payment to each member of the GCAA who receives an Effective or Highly Effective rating on their last year-end evaluation, if the following conditions are met: o A minimum fund balance of 9% or greater is achieved o Salary Factor = Most recent Audited Fund Balance % of Revenues less Minimum Fund Balance % (i.e., 9%) o One-time Off-Schedule payment = 2014-15 Base Salary x Salary Factor If the timing of audited fund balance following the decision 2018-2019 school year falls below 8%, GCAA members that received a step increase in 2018-2019 will move back one half-step on the salary schedule for the 2019-2020 GCAA contract year. Each administrator shall have group term life insurance coverage in an amount equal to establish three (3) times his/her annual contractual salary and group term dependent life insurance coverage as listed below. The premiums for such insurances shall be paid by each administrator through payroll deduction semi-annually. At the position precludes such a meetingsame time, the Employer Board shall meet with reimburse each administrator for such semi-annual premium payment as additional salary. Lives of dependent children - $10,000 each child 14 days to 19 years old (extended to 23 years if full-time college student) Life of spouse $10,000 Hospitalization and Major Medical Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses and/or Dependent Children • Effective January 1, 2018, eligible employees may elect to enroll in the Association as soon as possibleBlue Care Network (BCN) Health Maintenance Organization (HMO) High Deductible Health Plan. The parties may District will fund the HDHP plan up to the Hard Cap, but not to exceed the Hard Cap. Plan options and rates are subject to adjustment based upon updated claim experiences that influence the illustrative rates, as well as any legislated adjustments to the Hard Cap limits. Any changes will be communicated through the Open Enrollment process. • The Blue Care Network (BCN) Health Maintenance Organization (HMO) High Deductible Health Plan shall be administered by the insurance company’s Health Savings Account (HSA) administrator. • The District and the GCAA agree that the position should be allowed to operate without engage in future discussion to find a defined workload menu of health care options for some defined period of time members to determine what a reasonable workload might beenhance options and control costs. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Contract Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least Upon ratification of the Master Agreement, the Association shall not bring up matters for negotiation to the Board and the Board will not bring up matters to the Association except by written mutual consent and as provided in Sections B and L of this ARTICLE and ARTICLE XIV, Section C. B. Within one hundred twenty (120) days, but not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, and upon written notice by the Association, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleARTICLE, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its six (6) representatives and two (2) alternates from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by both parties, but the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either D. Either party may at any time invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members of E. All negotiation meetings will be held in a room(s) mutually agreed upon by the chief negotiators for the Board and Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, . F. All negotiation meetings will be closed to all persons who are employees not duly appointed representatives or alternates under this ARTICLE. Each team, with as much notice as possible may bring in consultants for the purpose of aiding in the Employernegotiation of specific proposals. G. All negotiation meetings will be set as to time, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings duration and agenda by mutual agreement of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourschief negotiators. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings H. There shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted no release of information concerning opposition proposals and/or tentative agreements, except by mutual agreement, and except to acquire technical information relative to specific proposals, and except that the chief negotiator for the Board may brief the Board and the chief negotiator for the Association may brief the members of the Association relative to progress in negotiations. However, should the parties reach impasse, this rule shall cease to operate with respect to tentative agreements and proposals on the table at that time. F. Prior I. All agreements shall be tentative pending final agreement on an entire tentative contract by the negotiating representatives for both sides. J. Each team shall have on the table at all times a set of proposals, which if agreed to by the other team along with all tentative contract agreements in effect, shall constitute an entire tentative contract. K. Notwithstanding the expiration of this Agreement, the negotiation procedures outlined in this ARTICLE shall be in effect until a successor agreement is negotiated and ratified. Level A Paid Days 220 Weeks Worked 44 Position Middle School Assistant Principal 225 45 Assistant Director of Community Education 225 45 Director, Vocational Education 225 45 Asst. Director of Curriculum and Instruction B 225 45 Associate High School Principal 220 44 Elementary Principal 225 225 45 45 Associate Director, Developmental Learning Program Director, Secondary Special Needs 225 45 Director, Federal Projects and Research C 230 46 Director of Community Education 225 45 Middle School Principal 225 225 45 45 Director, Developmental Learning Program Director of Student Services D 230 46 High School Principal 230 46 Director of Curriculum and Instruction 230 46 Director of Special Services 230 46 Director of Employee Benefits and Transportation Operations Each administrator shall have group term life insurance coverage in an amount equal to three (3) times his/her annual contractual salary and group term dependent life insurance coverage as listed below. The premiums for such insurances shall be paid by each administrator through payroll deduction semi-annually. At the same time, the Board shall reimburse each administrator for such semi-annual premium payment as additional salary. Lives of dependent children - $10,000 each child 14 days to 19 years old (extended to 23 years if full-time college student) Life of spouse $10,000 Hospitalization and Major Medical Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses and/or Dependent Children Continue to offer BC/BS 4.0 plan to all current administrators with the $5/$10 Prescription Rider. The current plan shall be modified so as to provide a two million dollar ($2,000,000) lifetime cap on benefits; routine mammography, pap tests and PSA testing. Additionally, the current prescription coverage shall be modified to reflect participation with the Preferred Prescription Provider Rider. The Community Blue PPO 1 with the $5/$10 Prescription Rider shall be offered as an option to current administrators. Administrators who select this option shall receive a two-hundred fifty dollar ($250) cash payment each year. The cash payment may be used to expand the life benefit currently provided to members if the individual so desires. Effective July 1, 2003 all new administrators shall be enrolled in the Community Blue PPO 1 plan instead of the current plan effective February 1, 2006. New administrators shall continue in the Community Blue PPO 1 plan for four years. After the fourth year, members shall then have the option of changing coverage to the establishment of any new position current medical effective February 1, 2006 as provided in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might bethis agreement. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Contract Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior An emergency manager appointed under the Local Financial Stability and Choice Act is authorized to reject, modify, or terminate this Agreement as provided in the expiration Local Financial Stability and Choice Act, 2012 Public Act 436. B. It is the intent of this Agreement to cover all matters of common concern, therefore, it is agreed by both parties that all items are closed to further consideration during the life of this Agreement, including salary Schedules A and B, unless both parties mutually agree for the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions need to deal with the negotiation of employment of employees covered by this Agreementcertain items. B. C. In any negotiations described negotiation discussion in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating negotiation representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the Association. The membership of the Association casting ballots, but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and to consider concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members Copies of this Agreement shall be printed and presented to all teachers now employed, or hereafter employed, by the Board. Teachers currently employed shall receive their copies of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees contract no more than thirty (30) days after the agreement is ratified by both parties. Teachers employed after that period of time shall receive a copy of the Employer, shall be released from contract upon their normal duties without loss hiring and/or their first day of salary when meetings work in the District. The Association and the board of education will evenly share the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourscosts of printing. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year If any provision of this Agreement or any application of this Agreement to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings any teacher or group of teachers shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved found contrary to law, then such provision or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior application shall not be deemed valid and subsistent, except to the establishment extent permitted by law, but all other provisions or applications shall continue in full force and effect. It is further agreed that within thirty (30) days of any new position in the bargaining unitnotification of a final and binding determination of such illegality, the Employer shall notify and Association/Union will commence negotiations to reach a new agreement concerning the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing subject matter of the decision provision determined to establish be illegal, to the position precludes extent that such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement subject matter may be reopenednegotiated under the law.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At Representatives of the Board and the Association's bargaining committee may meet each month for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the contract and to resolve problems that may arise. These meetings are not intended to bypass the grievance procedure. Each party will submit to the other, two (2) days prior to the meeting, an agenda covering what they wish to discuss. All meetings between the parties will regularly be scheduled to take place as promptly as possible at times when the teachers involved are free from assigned responsibilities, unless otherwise mutually agreed. Should such meeting result in a mutually acceptable amendment to the Agreement, then the amendment shall be subject to ratification by the Board and the Association provided that the bargaining committee shall be empowered to effect temporary accommodations to resolve special problems. B. The Association shall designate a teacher in each school building as Association Representative (A.R.). The principal and Association Representative may meet as necessary for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the contract and to resolve problems which may arise. These meetings are not intended to by-pass the grievance procedure. C. A least sixty ninety (6090) days prior to the expiration of this the Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations shall initiate negotiation for the purpose of entering into a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement for the forthcoming year. B. In X. Xxxxxxx party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating negotiation or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Associationparty. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings There shall be established three (3) signed copies of the final Agreement for the purpose of record: one (1) retained by the group at Board, one (1) retained by the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on Association, and one (1) retained by the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementsuperintendent. F. Prior Copies of this Agreement shall be printed at the expense of the Board within thirty (30) days after the Agreement is signed and presented to all teachers now or hereafter employed. Further, the Board shall furnish thirty-five (35) copies of the Master Agreement to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beits use. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, It is contemplated that terms and conditions of employment provided in this Agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of employees the special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern of the parties which have not been fully or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters be provided. The parties accordingly undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for discussion, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. Not later than April 1 of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires, the Board agrees to negotiate with the Association over a successor agreement in accordance with the procedure set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach agreement concerning teachers' salaries and all other conditions of their employment. Such negotiation may include, but not be limited to, the subjects covered by this AgreementAgreement and any other matters mutually agreed to be negotiable by the parties. Any agreement so negotiated will apply to all teachers and will be reduced to writing and signed by the Board and the Association. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that While no final Agreement between the parties may agreement shall be executed without ratification by the Board Association and the Association. The Board, the parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsnegotiation, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. D. Members E. Board agrees that whenever the Association and the Board mutually agree to engage in contract negotiations during the school day, representatives of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall Association will be released relieved from their normal all regular duties without loss of salary when meetings pay in order to permit their participation in such meetings; provided, however, that the Association shall advise the Board, before such mutual agreement, of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursmaximum number of teachers to be so involved. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Professional Negotiation Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior During the month of September of each year that the Association is recog- nized, the parties will meet to establish negotiation procedures. Such proce- dures may include but not be limited to meeting dates, times and locations, limitation on the number of team members, consultants and/or observers, tentative Agreement procedures, expense sharing of third-party neutrals, and identification of a chief spokesperson, as appropriate. B. The parties agree to consult in advance about the general and specific content of all press and public communications dealing with the directions and ac- complishments of the teams that might be released from time to time by the parties, either jointly or independently. Every effort will be made to provide full information to the expiration public with the exception that, in order to maintain the C. This Agreement may be modified in whole or in part by an instrument in writing duly executed by both parties. D. This Agreement incorporates the entire understanding of the parties on all matters that were or could have been the subject of negotiation. During the term of this Agreement, the parties neither party will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wagesbe required to negotiate with respect to any matters, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both parties at the time they negotiated or executed this Agreement. B. E. It is agreed and understood by the parties that this Agreement represents the full Agreement between said parties to date on all matters negotiated in accordance with Section 6-510 of the Annotated Code of Maryland, Education. The Agreement, if changed by action of the county fiscal authority, shall be submitted to the parties following the funding of the school operating budget by said authority. If renego- tiation of the Agreement is required and final ratification is agreed upon by both parties, said final ratification will constitute final execution of this Agreement. It is further understood that, when ratified, this Agreement shall be given full force and effect by said parties for the entire term thereof. F. If the Xxxxxxxxxx County Council, in the exercise of its fiscal authority under the law, reduces the budget recommendations of the Board of Education and if such action makes it necessary for the Board to reduce one or more items that have been negotiated, such items and all other negotiated items that are dependent upon budget funding shall be subject to renegotiation prior to mak- ing the final determination, in accordance with the timetable and procedure to be established by the state Board of Education. G. An impasse shall be deemed to exist if the Board and Association teams have not reached a tentative agreement by January 15. 1. Should either party suggest an impasse, the procedures as provided for in Section 6-510 of the Annotated Code of Maryland, Education relating to impasse shall be followed. 2. In any negotiations described the event that the parties are unable to agree upon a third party, the parties agree to submit their impasse to the American Arbitration Association for assistance in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of a third party. 3. If a panel is activated, the negotiating representatives panel shall meet together and individually with the parties and within thirty (30) days render a report setting forth its recommen- dations for the resolution of the other party impasse. The parties agree to cooperate with the panel and each provide such information and assistance as it may request. 4. The parties shall have five (5) days to react to the panel’s recommendations. If the impasse is not then resolved, either party may select its representatives from within or outside make the school districtpanel’s findings and recommendations public. It is recognized that no final Agreement between The panel’s findings and recom- mendations shall be advisory only and not binding on either party. 5. The costs for the parties may services of the third party, including per diem expenses, if any, and actual and necessary travel and subsistence expenses, shall be executed without ratification borne equally by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty 1. Reasonable efforts shall be made to commence negotiations within twenty (6020) days prior from January 1st of the year the contract terminates. 2. All negotiations will be conducted in executive session. 3. At the first negotiation session, both parties may mutually agree to modify this Article to suit their needs. 4. Definite dates and starting times for meetings will be established. Future days will be agreed upon no later than the second meeting subsequent to the expiration of this Agreementinitial meeting. All meetings will be held during non-school hours, unless mutually agreed to. 5. Negotiations shall take place at a site convenient to both parties. 6. Additional ground rules will be discussed no later than the parties will begin negotiations second meeting subsequent to the initial meeting. 7. Either party may, independently, call for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementcaucus at any time during the negotiating session. B. In 8. The process of tabling may be used. (Tabling shall mean “the temporary suspension of negotiations on a specific item.”) 9. The representatives will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals, and reach agreements in the course of negotiations. Once such agreements have been reached on individual articles, they will be initialed by both parties and will be understood to stand as tentative agreements subject to final ratification. 10. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtSchool District. 11. It is recognized that no final Agreement between Either party may, with prior notification to the parties other party, bring into the negotiations any outside legal and/or professional advisors. 12. Either party may call upon consultants to assist in preparing them for negotiations and/or to advise them during negotiations. The expense of such consultants shall be executed without ratification borne by the Board party requesting the services. 13. A free exchange of facts, opinions, proposals and the Associationcounter-proposals shall take place on all issues in an effort to reach agreement. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by Therefore, each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority party agrees to make proposals available, upon reasonable and concessions specified request, all data, research, and other pertinent materials in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationits possession on any issue under consideration. C. If 14. In the parties fail event that the contract expires prior to reach an agreement the ratification of a new contract, the terms of the grievance procedure (Article 27) of the expired contract shall continue in any such negotiations, either party may invoke full force and effect until the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendednew contract is ratified. D. Members of 15. In the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree event that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may shall be reopenedheld void or illegal by a court of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be void and inoperative, and all other provisions of this agreement shall continue in effect.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the The Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with Association agree it is their mutual responsibility to confer upon their respective representative the necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions counterproposals in the course of negotiating, and to reach tentative agreements to present respectively to the Board and the Association to ratify. Each party to negotiations shall select its negotiating representatives, provided that the Board shall not select a GESSA employee, as herein defined, as its representative. B. Unless both parties agree to an alternate date, the parties shall commence negotiations by meeting no later than February 1 of the last year of the Agreement. Meetings shall be held as necessary at times and places agreed to by both parties. C. The parties may mutually agree to enlist the assistance of a third party to assist in the negotiation process. D. During negotiations, agreed‐upon materials shall be prepared for the Board and the Association and, unless otherwise agreed by the parties at the time, initialed prior to the adjournment of the meeting at which such agreement was reached. E. When the Association and Board reach tentative agreement on all matters being negotiated, the items will be reduced to writing and shall be submitted to the membership of the Association for ratification and to the Board for official approval. F. Impasse Procedures 1. An impasse occurs after both parties have considered the proposals and counterproposals of the other party in good faith and when, despite such diligent efforts, no agreement can be reached on the subject being negotiated. During the course of negotiations, subject only the respective committees shall make every good faith effort to such ultimate ratificationreach agreement on all issues before invoking the following procedure. C. 2. If after a reasonable period of negotiation, and within ninety (90) days before the scheduled start of the upcoming school year, the parties engaged in collective bargaining have reached impasse, either party may petition the Illinois Educational Labor Relations Board (“IELRB”) to initiate mediation or request a mediator through the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service. 3. When an impasse is declared, or the IELRB invokes mediation, the parties shall seek to agree upon a mediator. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in such agreement, within seven (7) calendar days, the parties will select a mediator from the staff of the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service. If the Federal Mediation and Conciliation service is unable, for any reason, to provide a mediator within ten (10) calendar days after being so requested, the parties will select a mediator from a list to be supplied by the American Arbitration Association. 4. Once a mediator has been appointed or selected, the mediator will meet with the parties or their representatives, or both, forthwith, either jointly or separately, and will take such negotiationssteps, as the mediator may deem appropriate to persuade the parties to resolve their differences and effect a mutually acceptable agreement. The mediator will not, without the consent of both parties, make findings of fact or recommend terms of settlement. Any time after fifteen (15) days of mediation, either party or the mediator may invoke initiate the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedpublic posting process. Initiation of the public posting process must be filed with the IELRB and copies must be submitted to the parties the same day. Within seven (7) days after the initiation of the public posting process, each party shall submit to the mediator, the IELRB and the other party in writing, the most recent offer of the party, including a cost summary. Seven (7) days after receipt of the parties’ offers, the IELRB will make the offers public. D. Members 5. The costs of any third party mutually agreed upon shall be shared equally by the parties. It is the desire of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, Board of Education of District 225 to recognize services of its full time GESSA employees who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior have provided long and effective service to the establishment youth of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association our community through a program of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might bevoluntary termination benefits. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior During the negotiations leading up to the expiration of this Agreement, each party had the parties right to make proposals and bargain on all bargainable matters. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the parties. During its life, each party therefore agrees that the other will begin negotiations not be required to engage in further bargaining on any matter, whether covered herein or not, except for matters which are subject to the Professional Grievance Procedure. Matters of concern may be discussed through the ongoing collaborative bargaining process and any agreement which results may become a new part of this Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions by mutual agreement of employment of employees covered by this Agreementthe parties. B. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives or bargaining representative of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that the representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make and consider proposals and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. There shall be three (3) signed copies for purposes of record, one (1) to be retained by the Board, one (1) by the Association, and one (1) by the Superintendent. A copy of this Agreement shall be provided (print or electronic) to all teachers. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members E. A teacher engaged during the school day in negotiating on behalf of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees Association with any representative of the EmployerBoard or participating in any professional negotiation, including arbitration, shall be released from their normal regular duties without loss of salary or benefits when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly such negotiation or arbitration is held during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group day at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on request of the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementBoard. F. Prior to If during the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section duration of this agreement may contract, district per pupil revenues increase or decrease by three percent (3%) or more, based on the prior year, financial terms shall be reopenedre-opened for negotiation.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty After January 1st of the year in which this Agreement expires, the Association may present to the District a proposed successor agreement. The District agrees to meet and negotiate with the As- sociation over a successor agreement in accordance with the procedures set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach agreement. Such negotiations may, at the request of either party, in- clude any matters covered by this Agreement or any matters not so covered which are legally permissible subjects of negotiations. Any agreement so negotiated will be reduced to writing and signed by the District and the Association. During negotiations, the District and the Association will present relevant data, exchange points of view and make proposals and counter-proposals. The District will provide the Association, within five (605) working days of receipt of written request to the Superintendent, with public information (records, data, worksheets) and budgetary materi- als which may be relevant to negotiations or processing grievances. B. Either party may utilize the services of outside consultants and/or resource persons and may call upon them to assist in the negotiations. As a courtesy, the party utilizing these services should notify the other party twenty-four (24) hours prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementmeetings. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party C. The District and the Association may designate representatives to meet and negotiate. Agree- ments reached by representatives shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without subject to ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedAssocia- tion. D. Members of Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places during the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoregular school day, who are employees of the Employer, provided that meetings shall be released held within five (5) working days from their normal duties without loss receipt of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursa written re- quest. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams Association and District shall meet at least quarterly during designate not more than eight (8) representatives who shall have the school year right to attempt receive reasonable periods of released time without loss of compensation when meeting and negotiating or to resolve problemsattend impasse proceedings. The topics for these meetings shall be Guidelines established by the group at Public Employment Relations Board will be followed regarding the previous quarter’s amount of released time granted the Association for the purpose of meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementand negotiating subsequent contracts. F. Prior to the establishment The District, upon request of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the positionSuperintendent, shall furnish the Association with public information that is relevant to the Association’s role as the exclusive bargaining repre- sentative. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing The information requested shall be provided within five (5) working days of receipt of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meetingwritten request. Information shall include county and state-required reports, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period copies of time to determine what a reasonable workload might bebudget reports and other public information. G. By mutual consent Not later than November 1st, the District shall furnish the Association with the placement of both parties any section unit members on the respective salary schedules as of this agreement may be reopenedOctober 1.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Contract

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty The District and Association may reopen negotiations for the school years 2021-2022 and 2022-2023, on Article 20, Health and Welfare; Article 21, Salary; and two (602) days prior additional articles each. B. Not later than May 15 of the school year preceding the year covered by reopener negotiations, the Association’s initial proposal regarding reopener negotiations must be submitted to the expiration of this AgreementDistrict. C. Not later than May 15, 2023, the parties will begin negotiations Association shall submit its initial proposal to the District for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this successor Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection D. Upon receipt of the negotiating representatives written initial proposal(s) or the successor Agreement, arrangements shall be made pursuant to the provisions of the other party Educational Employment Relations Act, including the Public Notice Provisions, for meeting and each party may select its representatives from within or outside negotiating to commence. The Board shall meet and negotiate in good faith with the school districtAssociation on negotiable items. It is recognized that no final Agreement Any agreement reached between the parties shall be reduced to writing and signed by them. E. Either party may be executed without ratification by utilize the service of outside consultants to assist in the negotiations. F. The Board and the AssociationAssociation may discharge their meeting and negotiating duties by means of authorized individuals. G. Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places during the regular school day, provided that meetings shall be held within five (5) days from receipt of a written request. The parties mutually pledge that Association shall designate three (3) representatives selected by who shall each shall be clothed with necessary power receive a reasonable amount of released time without loss of compensation for meeting and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationnegotiating. C. If H. The Board shall, upon request, furnish the parties fail Association with one (1) copy of all county and state required reports as soon as they are transmitted to reach an agreement in any the county or state, or within five (5) days, of such negotiationsrequest. In addition, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 Board shall provide copies of all other public information (such as amended. D. Members budgetary) which it produces that are necessary for the Association to fulfill its role as the exclusive bargaining representative, as soon as it becomes available, or within five (5) days of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursrequest. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams I. Not later than October 15, the District shall meet at least quarterly during furnish the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by Association with the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain placement of unit members on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementregular salary schedule as of October 1st. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty The District and Association may reopen negotiations for the school years 2021-2022 and 2022-2023, on Article 20, Health and Welfare; Article 21, Salary; and two (602) days prior additional articles each. B. Not later than May 15 of the school year preceding the year covered by reopener negotiations, the Association’s initial proposal regarding reopener negotiations must be submitted to the expiration of this AgreementDistrict. C. Not later than May 15, 2023, the parties will begin negotiations Association shall submit its initial proposal to the District for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this successor Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection D. Upon receipt of the negotiating representatives written initial proposal(s) or the successor Agreement, arrangements shall be made pursuant to the provisions of the other party Educational Employment Relations Act, including the Public Notice Provisions, for meeting and each party may select its representatives from within or outside negotiating to commence. The Board shall meet and negotiate in good faith with the school districtAssociation on negotiable items. It is recognized that no final Agreement Any agreement reached between the parties shall be reduced to writing and signed by them. X. Xxxxxx party may be executed without ratification by utilize the service of outside consultants to assist in the negotiations. F. The Board and the AssociationAssociation may discharge their meeting and negotiating duties by means of authorized individuals. G. Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places during the regular school day, provided that meetings shall be held within five (5) days from receipt of a written request. The parties mutually pledge that Association shall designate three (3) representatives selected by who shall each shall be clothed with necessary power receive a reasonable amount of released time without loss of compensation for meeting and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationnegotiating. C. If H. The Board shall, upon request, furnish the parties fail Association with one (1) copy of all county and state required reports as soon as they are transmitted to reach an agreement in any the county or state, or within five (5) days, of such negotiationsrequest. In addition, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 Board shall provide copies of all other public information (such as amended. D. Members budgetary) which it produces that are necessary for the Association to fulfill its role as the exclusive bargaining representative, as soon as it becomes available, or within five (5) days of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursrequest. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams I. Not later than October 15, the District shall meet at least quarterly during furnish the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by Association with the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain placement of unit members on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementregular salary schedule as of October 1st. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the The Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with Association agree it is their mutual responsibility to confer upon their respective representative the necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions counter proposals in the course of negotiating, and to reach tentative agreements to present respectively to the Board and the Association to ratify. Each party to negotiations shall select its negotiating representatives, provided that the Board shall not select a GESPA employee, as herein defined, as its representative. B. Unless both parties agree to an alternate date, the parties shall commence negotiations by meeting no later than February 1 of the last year of the Agreement. Meetings shall be held as necessary at times and places agreed to by both parties. C. The parties may mutually agree to enlist the assistance of a third party to assist in the negotiation process. D. During negotiations, agreed-upon materials shall be prepared for the Board and the Association and, unless otherwise agreed by the parties at the time, initialed prior to the adjournment of the meeting at which such agreement was reached. E. When the Association and Board reach tentative agreement on all matters being negotiated, the items will be reduced to writing and shall be submitted to the membership of the Association for ratification and to the Board for official approval. F. Impasse Procedures 1. An impasse occurs after both parties have considered the proposals and counterproposals of the other party in good faith and when, despite such diligent efforts, no agreement can be reached on the subject being negotiated. During the course of negotiations, subject only the respective committees shall make every good faith effort to such ultimate ratificationreach agreement on all issues before invoking the following procedure. C. 2. If after a reasonable period of negotiation, and within ninety (90) days before the scheduled start of the upcoming school year, the parties engaged in collective bargaining have reached impasse, either party may petition the Illinois Educational Labor Relations Board (“IELRB”) to initiate mediation or request a mediator through the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service. 3. When an impasse is declared, or the IELRB invokes mediation, the parties shall seek to agree upon a mediator. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in such agreement, within seven (7) calendar days, the parties will select a mediator from the staff of the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service. If the Federal Mediation and Conciliation service is unable, for any reason, to provide a mediator within ten (10) calendar days after being so requested, the parties will select a mediator from a list to be supplied by the American Arbitration Association. 4. Once a mediator has been appointed or selected, the mediator will meet with the parties or their representatives, or both, forthwith, either jointly or separately, and will take such negotiationssteps, as the mediator may deem appropriate to persuade the parties to resolve their differences and effect a mutually acceptable agreement. The mediator will not, without the consent of both parties, make findings of fact or recommend terms of settlement. Any time after fifteen (15) days of mediation, either party or the mediator may invoke initiate the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedpublic posting process. Initiation of the public posting process must be filed with the IELRB and copies must be submitted to the parties the same day. Within seven (7) days after the initiation of the public posting process, each party shall submit to the mediator, the IELRB and the other party in writing, the most recent offer of the party, including a cost summary. Seven (7) days after receipt of the parties’ offers, the IELRB will make the offers public. D. Members 5. The costs of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, any third party mutually agreed upon shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established shared equally by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementparties. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Negotiated Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior 4.1 Three representatives designated by the School Board and three representatives designated by the MEA shall constitute a joint negotiating committee. Each member representative group may name one additional member as a substitute. Neither party shall have to notify the other regarding one of the four serving as a replacement representative. No more than three representatives shall be in any one-negotiation session. Each party shall inform the other party 72 hours in advance if they plan to have a professional negotiator represent them at negotiations. 4.2 If negotiations are requested by either party on matters specified in Article 4, Paragraph 4.5 below, official written notice must be made on or before April 1st of the year the contract expires to the expiration other party of the agreement of its desires to terminate, end or modify this Agreementagreement. Negotiation procedures shall begin with the first meeting being no later than April 20th of the year in which the current agreement expires with negotiating meetings to be held as necessary at times and places agreed upon by both parties. 4.3 The MEA and the School Board agree that negotiations, in good faith, can encompass all or some aspects of policy governing the parties will begin negotiations following items: a. Negotiation procedures b. Salaries of all certificated professional employees whose duties have qualified them for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and or are leading them toward tenure status except the positions excluded in Article II. c. Related economic conditions of employment (fringe benefits) d. Reduction in Force e. Grievance procedure f. Leave of employees covered absence g. Teaching load h. Teacher evaluation procedure i. Salaries for listed extra duties 4.4 All participants have the right to utilize the services of consultants in the deliberation. All costs of consultants will be paid for by this Agreementthe participants using their services. B. In any negotiations described in this article4.5 a When tentative agreement is reached on all matters being negotiated, neither party shall have control over a written memorandum of understanding embodying tentative negotiation agreements will be submitted to the selection MEA membership and the full School Board for ratification. b Such document, if ratified by both parties, will become part of the negotiating representatives official minutes of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside School Board. When necessary, provisions in the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between agreement shall be reflected in the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Associationindividual teacher’s contract. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each agreement shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in not discriminate against any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members member of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursprofessional teaching staff. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Professional Services

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At 4.1 Not earlier than the first week of the school year in which this Agreement expires, and after the public is allowed input as required by the Act, the District and Federation agree to meet and negotiate by May 15 and as often as is necessary in order to negotiate, reach agreement, and reduce to writing the various issues contained within the scope of negotiations as defined in the Act. 4.2 The Federation may designate not more than three (3) employees in the bargaining unit, whose identity shall be made immediately known to the District Superintendent, (hereinafter referred to as the Superintendent) or his/her designee, in order to permit said unit members’ participation in the negotiations. Not more than three (3) members of management, whose identity shall be made immediately known to the Federation, shall participate in the negotiation process on behalf of the District. 4.3 Either party may utilize the services of outside consultants to assist in the negotiations. 4.4 Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places and during the regular school day at least sixty 50% of the time, provided that meeting shall be held within seven (607) school days from receipt of a written request. When it is necessary for the Federation to schedule meetings for processing of grievances, it shall be the responsibility of the designated unit members (any employee included in the bargaining unit) to notify the Superintendent or his/her designee of the meeting times, dates, and place and to request release time which shall be no later than 24 hours prior to the expiration commencement of this Agreement, such sessions. Each chief negotiator will be responsible for notifying members of his/her time of the parties will begin negotiations time and place for the next meeting. The agenda for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions subsequent meeting shall be established at the conclusion of employment of employees covered by this Agreementeach session. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party 4.5 The parties agree that the person acting as chief negotiator shall be the chief spokesman for the respective parties and shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and full authority to make proposals and concessions counter-proposals and to sign tentative agreements, subject to ratification by a majority of the District Trustees and by a majority of the Federation membership of the full contractual agreement. Only the chief negotiators or their representatives shall transit inter-team documents to the other party. This may be done in a formal meeting, through hand-delivery, by facsimile transmission or through U.S. mail. During negotiations items tentatively agreed upon shall be reduced to writing, initialed by both parties, and be considered part of the total contract settlement. All information, data, and documents requested for negotiations shall be distributed to all three members of the Federation negotiating team. 4.6 It is understood and agreed that all negotiation sessions will be held in an executive session unless otherwise mutually agreed upon in advance by both parties. Should an impasse be declared, the declaring party is responsible for notifying the Public Employment Relations Board and to comply with said Board’s regulations for mediation and fact-finding. 4.7 No Bargaining unit employee shall engage in Federation activities during the time he/she is assigned to teaching or other school related duties, except that members of the Federation’s negotiation commit shall be excused without loss of pay for working time spent in negotiation with the District or its representatives as provided above for negotiations and for the processing of grievances, or as provided elsewhere in this contract or in the law. The District agrees not to discriminate against any Federation member because of his/her participation in negotiations or grievance processing. 4.8 During the course of negotiationsnegotiations described in this Article, subject only to the parties mutually pledge that such ultimate ratificationnegotiations shall be conducted in good faith. C. If 4.9 Unless otherwise provided herein, the parties fail to reach an agreement in designated unit members of the Federation’s bargaining committee and Federation representatives shall not interfere with the performance of any such negotiations, either party may invoke unit member’s duties or disrupt the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedunit member’s instructional day. D. Members 4.10 The Federation shall have the right to inspect the original copy of any public record of the AssociationDistrict during the regular office hours at the Superintendent’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees office. 4.11 Computer and raw data of public records having a direct relationship to the scope of negotiations as identified in Section 3452 of the EmployerAct shall be available to the Federation in the form which the information was communicated to the Trustees. If such format does not exist, the requested data shall be provided in such a form as will cause the least burden in the judgment of the District Superintendent or his/her designee. 4.11.1 Statistics and records of the District necessary for the enforcement of this Agreement (including grievances) or relevant to negotiations shall be provided in a timely manner to the Federation upon request. 4.11.2 A copy of the Agenda and Board Packet, excluding personnel matter and other confidential material, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings provided to the Federation’s president at the same time such information is provided to members of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursBoard of Trustees. Such information shall include copies of all minus of Board meetings. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams 4.11.3 Upon the request of the Federation, the District shall meet at least quarterly during provide to it the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by names, addresses and the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementtelephone numbers of new continuing unit members. F. Prior to 4.11.4 Upon the establishment request of any new position in the bargaining unitFederation, the Employer District shall notify the Association of such provide to it a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing list of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period work assignments of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beall unit members. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty ‌ 4.1 The Association and the District shall meet to share and discuss their initial proposals no later than the fifteenth (6015th) days prior of October. The intent is to jointly sunshine these proposals no later than the first regularly scheduled Board meeting in November of the year the contract expires or is reopened. 4.2 Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places. Every reasonable effort will be made to complete the negotiation process by April 15. If the process is not completed by April 15, the District and Association may mutually agree to extend the dates, drop reopeners, move reopeners to the expiration following negotiation cycle, or either party may declare an impasse. 4.3 The parties shall meet and negotiate in good faith on negotiable items at mutually agreeable times which shall include both work and non-work time for unit members. 4.4 The District shall furnish the Association with requested of all county and state required reports as they are available, and requested copies of all budgetary and other information that are made available to the public at Board meetings, and are necessary for the Association to fulfill its role as exclusive bargaining representative. The Association shall at the District's discretion reimburse the District for time and labor involved in instances where the retrieval, production, or duplication of requested materials is required. The District agrees to provide the Association with a copy of all existing public reports for examination and duplication and such copies will be returned to the District within a reasonable period of time. 4.5 No later than November 1, the District shall furnish the Association with the placement of personnel on the respective salary schedule(s) as of October 15. 4.6 Within a reasonable period of time following ratification of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Board shall make the agreement available online. Any amendments to the Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification made available online by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course District within thirty (30) days of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Contract

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days Representatives of the Board and the Association's bargaining committee may meet on the last school day Tuesday of each month for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the contract, and to resolve the problems that may arise. These meetings are not intended to bypass the grievance procedure. Either party shall request such a meeting when they deem it necessary. The requesting party will submit to the other, on or before Friday prior to the expiration meeting, an agenda covering what they wish to discuss. All meetings between the parties will be scheduled to take place as promptly as possible, at times when the teachers involved are free from assigned instructional responsibilities, unless otherwise mutually agreed. Should such a meeting result in a mutually acceptable amendment of this Agreementthe agreement, then the amendment shall be subject to ratification by the Board and the Association, provided that the bargaining committee shall be empowered to effect temporary accommodations to resolve special problems. B. Prior to May 1 and in no event prior to March 1 (except by written agreement of the parties), the parties will begin shall initiate negotiations for the purpose of entering into a new Agreement covering wagessuccessor agreement. Release time shall be provided the Association's negotiating committee to permit the parties to alternately meet both during and after regular school hours. However, hours, terms and conditions the Board shall only be obligated to provide release time to five (5) teachers for the purpose of employment of employees covered by this Agreementnegotiations. The Board shall not make MPSERS contributions on wages paid for Association release time unless the affected teacher(s) agree to promptly reimburse the Board for such costs. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Associationparty. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall their representative will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members . There shall be three signed copies of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees final agreement for the purpose of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problemsrecord. The topics for these meetings shall be established One retained by the group at Board, one by the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated actionAssociation, and meet with one by the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beSuperintendent. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior It is agreed that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement, but of common concern to the expiration parties, shall be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this agreement. The parties undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. In the event the salary schedule is reopened for negotiation by either party, as provided in Appendix A, Salary Schedule paragraph 2 of this Agreement, the parties will promptly negotiate for the purpose of reaching an agreement upon a revised salary schedule. At least by April 1st, the parties will likewise begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms terms, and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party paßy may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the mediation procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedof the Michigan Employment Relations Commission, or take any other lawful means. D. Members E. During the first two weeks of each school quarter, the Association Professional Negotiating Committee and the Administrative Staff, together with a member of the Board of Education or its designee shall meet to discuss the administration of this Agreement and any problems under it which either party believes exist or may occur in the operation of the School District. The Superintendent of Schools or the chairman of the Professional Negotiating Committee shall be responsible for calling this meeting. An agenda shall be prepared by the paßies covering the subjects to be discussed at least one week prior to the meetings. F. Any special federal, state, or local aid program being considered for adoption by the District shall be brought to the attention of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that shall negotiate wages, hours, and working conditions of any federal, state, or local aid program adopted by the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beBoard if within this bargaining unit. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

AutoNDA by SimpleDocs

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. This Agreement expressly embodies all agreements written and oral between the District and the Association and is intended to cover all matters which were raised or could have been raised by either of the parties at the time of negotiations. Unless otherwise designated in this Agreement, any subject matter relating to wages, hours or working conditions of teachers which does not fall within the category of “matters which were raised or could have been raised by either of the parties at the time of negotiations” shall upon request of either party be subject to regular collective bargaining procedures. No amendment or supplement to this Agreement shall be effective or valid for any purpose whatsoever unless set out in writing and signed by the District and the Association. Memoranda of Understanding which have been executed by the Association President on behalf of the HEA and the Superintendent or their designee on behalf of the District shall continue in full force and effect for the duration of this Agreement. If both parties agree, any subject matter contained in this Agreement may be reopened for negotiations during the term of the contract. Failure of either party to so agree shall not be the subject of any grievance, complaint, objection or charge by the other party. B. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations negotiation for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe District. Provided, however, the parties may mutually agree on any other date for commencement of bargaining. It is acknowledged by the parties that such provision is for the purpose of the convenience of the parties and does not operate in derogation of any decision or rule of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. B. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither each party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may be free to select its representatives from within negotiating or outside the school districtbargaining representatives. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and a majority of the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that negotiating or bargaining representatives selected by each shall be clothed with have all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 final ratification as amendedabove noted. D. Members of The Superintendent or their designee(s) and the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from Association President or their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams designee(s) shall meet at least quarterly monthly (during the school year). The parties agree to meet at least periodically throughout the school year to attempt to resolve problemsmatters which may arise during the terms of this Agreement. The topics for these meetings shall be established by If no agreement is reached, the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position language contained in the current collective bargaining unitagreement shall remain in full force and effect. Should laws change during the life of this Agreement, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association parties agree to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association schedule negotiations as soon as possible. The parties may agree that possible to resolve the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beissue(s). G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. This Agreement expressly embodies all agreements written and oral between the District and the Association and is intended to cover all matters which were raised or could have been raised by either of the parties at the time of negotiations. Unless otherwise designated in this Agreement, any subject matter relating to wages, hours or working conditions of teachers which does not fall within the category of “matters which were raised or could have been raised by either of the parties at the time of negotiations” shall upon request of either party be subject to regular collective bargaining procedures. No amendment or supplement to this Agreement shall be effective or valid for any purpose whatever unless set out in writing and signed by the District and the Association in the same formality as used in the execution of this Agreement. Memoranda of Understanding which have been executed by the Association president on behalf of the HEA and the superintendent or his/her designee on behalf of the District shall continue in full force and effect for the duration of this Agreement. If both parties agree, any subject matter contained in this Agreement may be reopened for negotiations during the term of the contract. Failure of either party to so agree shall not be the subject of any grievance, complaint, objection or charge by the other party. B. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations negotiation for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe District. Provided, however, the parties may mutually agree on any other date for commencement of bargaining. It is acknowledged by the parties that such provision is for the purpose of the convenience of the parties and does not operate in derogation of any decision or rule of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. B. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither each party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may be free to select its representatives from within negotiating or outside the school districtbargaining representatives. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and a majority of the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that negotiating or bargaining representatives selected by each shall be clothed with have all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 final ratification as amendedabove noted. D. Members of The superintendent and/or her/his designee(s) and the Association’s negotiating team Association unit director and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams her/his designee(s) shall meet at least quarterly monthly (during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementyear). F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the The Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with Association agree it is their mutual responsibility to confer upon their respective representative the necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions counterproposals in the course of negotiating, and to reach tentative agreements to present respectively to the Board and the Association to ratify. Each party to negotiations shall select its negotiating representatives, provided that the Board shall not select a GESPA employee, as herein defined, as its representative. B. Unless both parties agree to an alternate date, the parties shall commence negotiations by meeting no later than February 1 of the last year of the Agreement. Meetings shall be held as necessary at times and places agreed to by both parties. C. The parties may mutually agree to enlist the assistance of a third party to assist in the negotiation process. D. During negotiations, agreed‐upon materials shall be prepared for the Board and the Association and, unless otherwise agreed by the parties at the time, initialed prior to the adjournment of the meeting at which such agreement was reached. E. When the Association and Board reach tentative agreement on all matters being negotiated, the items will be reduced to writing and shall be submitted to the membership of the Association for ratification and to the Board for official approval. F. Impasse Procedures 1. An impasse occurs after both parties have considered the proposals and counterproposals of the other party in good faith and when, despite such diligent efforts, no agreement can be reached on the subject being negotiated. During the course of negotiations, subject only the respective committees shall make every good faith effort to such ultimate ratificationreach agreement on all issues before invoking the following procedure. C. 2. If after a reasonable period of negotiation, and within ninety (90) days before the scheduled start of the upcoming school year, the parties engaged in collective bargaining have reached impasse, either party may petition the Illinois Educational Labor Relations Board (“IELRB”) to initiate mediation or request a mediator through the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service. 3. When an impasse is declared, or the IELRB invokes mediation, the parties shall seek to agree upon a mediator. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in such agreement, within seven (7) calendar days, the parties will select a mediator from the staff of the Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service. If the Federal Mediation and Conciliation service is unable, for any reason, to provide a mediator within ten (10) calendar days after being so requested, the parties will select a mediator from a list to be supplied by the American Arbitration Association. 4. Once a mediator has been appointed or selected, the mediator will meet with the parties or their representatives, or both, forthwith, either jointly or separately, and will take such negotiationssteps, as the mediator may deem appropriate to persuade the parties to resolve their differences and effect a mutually acceptable agreement. The mediator will not, without the consent of both parties, make findings of fact or recommend terms of settlement. Any time after fifteen (15) days of mediation, either party or the mediator may invoke initiate the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedpublic posting process. Initiation of the public posting process must be filed with the IELRB and copies must be submitted to the parties the same day. Within seven (7) days after the initiation of the public posting process, each party shall submit to the mediator, the IELRB and the other party in writing, the most recent offer of the party, including a cost summary. Seven (7) days after receipt of the parties’ offers, the IELRB will make the offers public. D. Members 5. The costs of any third party mutually agreed upon shall be shared equally by the parties. 2015-16 Paraprofessional New Hire Rates 102.80% Increase over prior year 260 188.5 188.5 186.5 186.5 Days per Year 8:00 8:00 7:30 8:00 7:30 Hours per Day 2,080 1508 1413.75 1492 1398.75 Hours per Year Range Hourly 1.00000 0.72500 0.67969 0.71731 0.67248 FTE Equivalent 1 14.79 30,768 22,307 20,913 22,070 20,691 2 15.09 31,384 22,753 21,331 22,512 21,105 3 15.39 32,011 23,208 21,757 22,962 21,527 4 15.70 32,651 23,672 22,193 23,421 21,957 5 16.01 33,304 24,145 22,636 23,889 22,396 2016-17 Paraprofessional New Hire Rates 102.50% Increase over prior year 260 188.5 188.5 186.5 186.5 Days per Year 8:00 8:00 7:30 8:00 7:30 Hours per Day 2,080 1508 1413.75 1492 1398.75 Hours per Year Range Hourly 1.00000 0.72500 0.67969 0.71731 0.67248 FTE Equivalent 1 15.16 31,537 22,864 21,435 22,622 21,208 2 15.47 32,168 23,322 21,864 23,075 21,632 3 15.77 32,811 23,788 22,301 23,536 22,065 4 16.09 33,468 24,264 22,748 24,007 22,506 5 16.41 34,137 24,749 23,202 24,487 22,956 2017-18 Paraprofessional New Hire Rates 102.30% Increase over prior year 260 188.5 188.5 186.5 186.5 Days per Year 8:00 8:00 7:30 8:00 7:30 Hours per Day 2,080 1508 1413.75 1492 1398.75 Hours per Year Range Hourly 1.00000 0.72500 0.67969 0.71731 0.67248 FTE Equivalent 1 15.51 32,263 23,390 21,928 23,142 21,696 2 15.82 32,908 23,859 22,367 23,605 22,130 3 16.14 33,566 24,335 22,814 24,077 22,572 4 16.46 34,237 24,822 23,271 24,559 23,024 5 16.79 34,922 25,318 23,736 25,050 23,484 It is the desire of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, Board of Education of District 225 to recognize services of its full time GESPA employees who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior have provided long and effective service to the establishment youth of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association our community through a program of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might bevoluntary termination benefits. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Negotiated Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement but of common concern to the parties shall be subject to the professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this Agreement upon request by either party to the other. The parties undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. The items to be negotiated shall have approval of both parties before negotiations shall start. B. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this the Agreement, the parties will likewise begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms terms, and conditions of employment of employees covered Support Staff by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives or bargaining representative of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation services of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission (MERC) or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. D. Members of 1. Premium per hour: a. Cafeteria (on Cafeteria Helper Wage Schedule) 1. Head Server High School +$.35 Middle School +$.35 2. Elementary Cook Page Elementary +$1.00 Xxx Elementary +$1.00 XxXxxx Elementary +$1.00 b. Executive Secretary to the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoPrincipal, Secretary to: High School Counselor, Athletic Director, Special Education Director, and Community Education Director – Secretary Xxxx Xxxxxxxx +$1.40 High School and Middle School Attendance office, Middle School Counseling, Operations Secretary, and Transportation Secretary – Secretary Xxxx Xxxxxxxx +$.70 c. Custodian - Custodial Schedule Night Premium for General Custodian +$.30 Building Charge +$.55 Building Charge M. S. +$.75 Building Charge H. S. +$.85 d. Elementary Office Clerks - Monitor Schedule XxXxxx - Xxx - Page +$.25 e. Paraeducators meeting requirements for NCLB +$.25 Current members who are employees of the Employercertified will receive this premium. Future members shall receive this premium if working in an assignment which requires it, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursor with administrative approval. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during f. Add $.20 to base wages for food service employees (to help offset eliminating the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics paid lunch) g. When substituting for these meetings shall the Head Cook, Cafeteria Helpers will be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain placed on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior Head Cook salary schedule closest to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated actiontheir per hour wage, and meet with will receive an additional stipend of $.50/hour. (Moved from the Association to negotiate workload for the positionletter of agreement) h. Lead Head Cook will receive an additional stipend of $.50/hour when fulfilling additional duties (authorized by supervisor). This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing 2 Longevity Years of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.Continuous Service 10 years +$.25 15 years +$.30 20 years +$.35 25 years +$.40

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least Upon ratification of the Master Agreement, the Association shall not bring up matters for negotiation to the Board and the Board will not bring up matters to the Association except by written mutual consent and as provided in Sections B and L of this ARTICLE and ARTICLE 14, Section C. B. Within one hundred twenty (120) days, but not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, and upon written notice by the Association, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleARTICLE, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its six (6) representatives and two (2) alternates from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by both parties, but the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either X. Xxxxxx party may at any time invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members of E. All negotiation meetings will be held in a room(s) mutually agreed upon by the chief negotiators for the Board and Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, . F. All negotiation meetings will be closed to all persons who are employees not duly appointed representatives or alternates under this ARTICLE. Each team, with as much notice as possible may bring in consultants for the purpose of aiding in the Employernegotiation of specific proposals. G. All negotiation meetings will be set as to time, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings duration and agenda by mutual agreement of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourschief negotiators. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings H. There shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted no release of information concerning opposition proposals and/or tentative agreements, except by mutual agreement, and except to acquire technical information relative to specific proposals, and except that the chief negotiator for the Board may brief the Board and the chief negotiator for the Association may brief the members of the Association relative to progress in negotiations. However, should the parties reach impasse, this rule shall cease to operate with respect to tentative agreements and proposals on the table at that time. F. Prior I. All agreements shall be tentative pending final agreement on an entire tentative contract by the negotiating representatives for both sides. J. Each team shall have on the table at all times a set of proposals, which if agreed to by the other team along with all tentative contract agreements in effect, shall constitute an entire tentative contract. K. Notwithstanding the expiration of this Agreement, the negotiation procedures outlined in this ARTICLE shall be in effect until a successor agreement is negotiated and ratified. 2022-2023 Level Paid Days Weeks Worked Position A 219 44 Middle School Assistant Principal 224 45 Assistant Director of Community Education 224 45 Director, Vocational Education 224 45 Asst. Director of Curriculum and Instruction B 219 44 Elementary Principal 224 224 45 45 Associate Director, Developmental Learning Program Director, Secondary Special Needs 224 45 Director, Federal Projects and Research C 224 45 Associate High School Principal 230 52 Director of Community Education 224 45 Middle School Principal 224 45 Director, Developmental Learning Program D 230 46 High School Principal 230 52 Director of Curriculum and Instruction 230 52 Director of Special Services 229 230 46 52 Director of Employee Benefits and Transportation Operations Director of Student Services • All salary levels are based on the previous schedule Ed Specialist educational level • A $2,000 increase will be added to the establishment base for a PhD or EdD received from an accredited university Through the duration of this Agreement, parity will be exclusively applied to on-schedule compensation between the GCAA and the GCEA, in addition to any new position one-time off-schedule payments. It is understood this Agreement reflects the restoration of wage concessions for the GCAA that began with the 2015- 2018 collective bargaining agreement, and continued through subsequent agreements with the 2018-2020 and 2020-2021 collective bargaining agreements. For purposes of parity, it will apply to any salary percentage increase and/or step increase (or “adjustment”) provided to the GCEA that is in excess of restorative levels established in the bargaining unit2014-2015 contract year. Additionally, parity will apply for any one-time off-schedule payments, not to include longevity or any similar stipends that are not considered “one-time.” For illustrative purposes, the Employer shall notify GCAA ended the Association of such 2020-2021 contract year with a contemplated action, and meet with five (5) percent on-schedule wage concession from the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions2014-2015 contract year. If the timing five (5) percent on-schedule wage concession is fully restored for the 2021-2022 contract year and, if the GCEA ended the 2020-2021 contract year with a three (3) percent wage concession from the 2014-2015 contract year, and received a four (4) percent on-schedule increase for the 2021-2022 contract year, equating to one (1) percent in excess of restorative wages, members of the decision to establish GCAA would receive an additional one (1) percent increase in wages above restoration from the position precludes such a meeting2014-2015 contract year. To calculate parity between the two bargaining groups, the Employer shall meet total increase will include all on-schedule and any one-time off-schedule increases between the two bargaining groups. Such a calculation will be determined not later than November 15, 2021, once it is determined if the GCAA is eligible for a fund balance payment, in accordance with the Association 2021-2022 Fund Balance Formula, as soon provided in this Agreement. Such a payment, as possiblea one-time off-schedule payment, would factor into the overall parity comparison between the two bargaining groups. The parties may agree Similarly, in the event step increases were negotiated with another bargaining unit that were not corresponding with any step increases provided to the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section GCAA during the life of this agreement may be reopenedcollective bargaining agreement, members of the GCAA would receive parity in keeping with such step increase(s).

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Employment Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees teachers employed by the Board; with respect to policies and procedures covered by this AgreementAgreement which are proper subjects under the law, for professional negotiations, the parties will undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any negotiable matters during this sixty (60) day period and until a new agreement is reached. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party. Each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power make proposals, consider proposals, and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members If counsel is to be used by either party in negotiations, said party will give five (5) days’ notice prior to the meeting in which legal counsel is to be used. Meetings may be canceled by notification to the other party by the chairman of the Association’s either negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, committee. Negotiation meetings shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of closed to the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourspress. E. The Both parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly recognize the desirability of continuous and uninterrupted operation of the instructional program during the normal school year and the avoidance of disputes which threaten to attempt to resolve problemsinterfere with such operations. The topics for these meetings shall be established Association accordingly agrees that it will not, during the period of this Agreement, directly or indirectly engage in or assist in any strike, as said term is defined by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementPublic Employment Relations Act. F. Prior This Agreement shall supersede any rules, regulations or practices of the Board which shall be contrary to or inconsistent with its terms. It shall likewise supersede any contrary or inconsistent terms contained in any individual teacher contracts heretofore in effect. All future individual teacher contracts shall be made expressly subject to the establishment terms of this Agreement or any new position in succeeding Agreement covering the bargaining unit, same school year as the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beteacher contracts. G. By mutual consent of both parties If any section provision of this agreement may Agreement or any application of the Agreement to any employee or group of employees shall be reopenedfound contrary to law, then such provision or application shall not be deemed valid and subsisting except to the extent permitted by law, but all other provisions or applications shall continue in full force and effect.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least It is contemplated that terms and conditions of employment provided in this Agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of the special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern of the parties, which have not been fully or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters of substantial changes in working conditions be provided. Thus, by mutual agreement, unique articles or sections may be re-negotiated. It is understood that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement but of common concern to the parties shall be subject to negotiation from time to time during the period of this Agreement upon thirty (30) days written notice by either party. B. A reasonable time prior to expiration of this Agreement, upon request of either party, negotiations will be undertaken for an agreement covering the school year. In any event, negotiations should begin not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives representative from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that While no final Agreement between the parties may agreement shall be executed without ratification by the Board Association and the Association. The Board, the parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members Within a 30 days after the Agreement has been signed; a copy of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall Master Agreement will be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursmade available to each teacher. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during During the school year representatives of the Board and the Association bargaining committee may meet periodically for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the Agreement. These meetings are not intended to attempt bypass the grievance procedure nor shall the interaction during these meetings be the basis of a grievance. Should such a meeting result in a mutually acceptable amendment of the Agreement, then the amendment shall be subject to ratification by the Board and the Association provided that the Bargaining Committees shall be empowered to effect temporary accommodations to resolve special problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty It is contemplated that the terrps and conditions o f employment as defined by the Public Employment Relations Board (60PERB) days prior provided in this Agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between parties. Nevertheless, because o f the special nature o f the public education process, it is likewise recognized that matters from time to time arise which are o f vital, mutual concern to the expiration of this Agreementparties. The parties accordingly agree to cooperate in arranging meetings, furnishing information, and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. By no later than March 1 o f the last year o f the current contract, the parties will begin enter into good-faith negotiations over a successor agreement. If the parties mutually agree to discuss topics for negotiation at times other than during the actual contract negotiations, such discussions may take place at a new Agreement covering wagesmutually agreeable time and place. If such an agreement is not concluded by May 1, hourseither pdrty may request the use o f mediation. The parties will seek a mutually acceptable mediator and will obtain a commitment from said mediator to serve. In case o f mediation by a private person, terms the cost o f such mediator shall be borne equally by both parties. If the Board and conditions of employment of employees covered Association are unable to agree on a mediator or are unable to obtain such commitment, the parties may request the State Public Employment Relations Board to assist If the parties retain a privatejnediatbr and have not reached agreement by this AgreementJune 1, either party may request the State Public Employment Relations to assist the parties to reach agreement. The provisions o f Section 209 o f the Civil Service Law w ill govern such mediation and fact-finding. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of o f the negotiating representatives of o f the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside without the school district. It is recognized that While no final Agreement between the parties may agreement shall be executed without final ratification by the Board Association and the Association. The Board, the parties mutually mutually, pledge that their representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions consider proposals, reach compromises in the course of o f negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedand review compromises with their respective members. D. Members Ground Rules and Negotiating 1. Date, time, and place for meetings should be agreeable to both negotiating teams: a. Meetings shall be closed and private. b. Meetings should not be the same night as regular school board meetings, unless agreed to by both parties. c. At the close o f the meetings, date, time, place and purpose of the Association’s negotiating next meeting should be set. d. In the event o f postponement, it is the duty o f the postponing team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of to reschedule the Employer, meeting within the ensuing week. Arrangements for postponing and rescheduling o f the meeting shall be released through the respective spokesperson. e. Neither party shall issue a formal press release or any informal information to members o f the press or public concerning the substance o f the demands under negotiation or concerning the parties’ positions thereon, prior to impasse. f. No electronic monitoring devices may be used without prior written consent from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of both parties. 2. Establish effective authority o f both negotiating teams reach agreement: a. Each team will notify the other o f the names o f its members and spokesperson. b. Communications between the two negotiating teams will be through the Board o f Education spokesperson and the Association spokesperson. c. Members o f both teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during understood to have powers to negotiate, in the school year to attempt to resolve problemsfullest sense o f the word. The topics for these meetings Powers shall be established by the group interpreted to mean that members o f both teams may make decisions on issues that arise at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possiblenegotiating meetings. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted Items agreed to may be reconsidered by mutual agreement. F. Prior 3. Agreement between the two teams as to negotiating procedures: a. Both parties reserve rights to use experts and consultants to speak only at the establishment of discretion o f the spokesperson or as spokesperson. b. Both parties reserve the right to recess for a reasonable length o f time. c. Both parties agree to a three (3) hour time limit for a negotiating meeting. 4. By mutual agreement, negotiations may be reopened at any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might bedeal with unexpected situations. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations Negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement successor contractual agreements between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each Union shall be clothed with necessary power done following the below procedures: A. Designated representatives of the Board and authority to make proposals and concessions representatives of the Federation shall constitute the representative negotiating committees. B. Each party in any negotiations shall select its negotiating representatives provided that the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationBoard shall not select a Teacher as herein defined as its representative. C. If Either party may select whomever it wishes to represent it in negotiations except as limited in “B” above. D. In a given year, as driven by contract expiration or re-opener requirements, the Union shall initiate a request to bargain between January 1 and April 1. Within thirty (30) days of receiving a written notice by the Union, both parties shall meet in the first bargaining session. Meetings shall be held as necessary at times and places agreed to by both parties. E. Facts, opinions, and proposals will be exchanged freely during the meeting or meetings in an effort to reach mutual understanding and agreement on matters defined as negotiable in Article II, Section B. F. Communication with the Board shall be through the Superintendent or his/her designated representative and requests to the Federation shall be made through the Superintendent or his/her designated representative to the President of the Federation. G. When the negotiations representatives for the Federation and Board reach tentative agreement on all matters being negotiated, the new Agreement will be reduced to writing, approved, signed and dated by negotiation representatives for the Federation and Board, and shall be submitted to the members of the bargaining unit for ratification and to the Board for official approval. H. Negotiations between the parties fail to reach shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of the Illinois Educational Labor Relations Act and the Rules and Regulations of the Illinois Educational Labor Relations Board. I. If an agreement in any such negotiationshas not been reached following a reasonable period of good faith bargaining, either party may invoke declare that an impasse exists and call for the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members assistance of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, a mediator. A written request for mediation by one party shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The considered as a joint request for mediation and both parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position join in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.formal request

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Negotiated Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior Negotiations will be conducted in accordance with state and federal laws. When an agreement is ratified and approved, its terms in regards to re-opening will be followed but all other items of the expiration contract shall only be addressed by mutual agreement in a Letter of this Agreement, Understanding. The Board and Association agree that the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions maintenance of employment conditions and general working conditions are important and that, should there be differences of employees covered by this Agreementinterpretation as to what those are, agree to discuss informally and if necessary resolve via mediation and I or arbitration. B. Beginning not later than March 1 of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires, the Caro Education Association and the Board agree to negotiate over a Successor Agreement in accordance with the procedures set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach Agreement concerning teachers' salaries, school calendar and all other conditions of their employment. Any Agreement so negotiated shall apply to all teachers and shall be reduced to writing and signed by the Board and the Caro Education Association. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Caro Education Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations of bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach negotiations described in this Article have reached an agreement impasse, upon expiration of this contract, the procedure described in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall state law will be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursfollowed. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during All Agreements are tentative until final Agreement is reached on the school year to attempt to resolve problemscomplete contract. The topics for these meetings Tentative Agreements shall be established duplicated, dated and initialed by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementchairperson of each party. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer Each party shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload have its chief negotiator or designee present for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a each meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent Each party may keep its own minutes of both the negotiating proceedings. H. Either party may caucus at any time. I. The parties any section to this Agreement will notify each other, in writing, of names of those who are to represent them in the administration of this agreement may be reopenedAgreement and those who have the authority to negotiate for them when that is appropriate.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Professional Negotiations Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty Matters concerning wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment not specifically covered by this Agreement, but of common concern to the parties, shall be subject to professional negotiations between them during the period of this Agreement upon mutual agreement of the parties. The parties undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. A temporary change in contract provisions not to exceed five (605) days prior to may be effected by mutual agreement between the parties' representatives. B. By January 15th, preceding the expiration of this Agreementthe contract, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered I.U.O.E. members employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside of the school district. Efforts will be made by both parties to this agreement, to maintain stability of membership in these negotiating groups. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the Association. The membership of the I.U.O.E., but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratificationratification by both parties. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during This agreement may be altered, changed, added to, deleted from or modified only through the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unitvoluntary, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of the negotiators in writing and signed by both parties any section as an amendment to this agreement. This paragraph subject to provisions of this agreement may be reopenedparagraph C above.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty six (606) days months prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will Board agrees to begin negotiations for with the UTF concerning a new successor Agreement, in accordance with the procedures set forth herein. Any Agreement covering wagesso negotiated shall apply to all teachers, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered shall be reduced to writing and signed by this Agreementthe Board and the UTF. B. In any negotiations described in this articleAgreement, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside without the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and by the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in membership of the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationUTF. C. If At the first official meeting of the respective bargaining teams the parties fail shall mutually establish negotiation ground rules which shall specifically describe the agreed upon process for the negotiation of a successor agreement to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedMaster Teacher Contract. D. Members Once a tentative agreement is reached, both bargaining teams agree to present and strongly recommend to their respective governing bodies acceptance of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees tentative Agreement. E. This Agreement incorporates the entire understanding of the Employerparties on all issues which were or could have been subject to negotiation. During the term of this Agreement neither party shall be required to negotiate with respect to any such matter whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the parties at the time they negotiated or signed this Agreement. F. When it is mutually agreed that negotiations referred to in Paragraph A between the UTF and the Board shall take place during the school day, any teacher so engaged shall be released from their normal regular duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might besalary. G. By In the event the negotiations described in Paragraph A above reach an impasse, the procedure described in Act 379 of the Michigan Public Acts of 1965, as amended from time to time, shall be followed when requested by either party. H. In order to promote and continue the cooperative atmosphere between teachers and administrators, the Board and UTF agree to establish a continuing Joint Labor/Management Committee to meet regularly to address mutual consent concerns. The Joint Labor/Management Committee will be equally representative, composed of six (6) members appointed respectively by both parties any section the UTF and the Board. A two-day training and organizational meeting of this agreement may committee shall be reopenedheld no later than September 30 of each year. The Joint Labor/Management Committee will determine its own charter and purpose. The Joint Labor/Management Committee shall have authority to adopt clarifications of, or Memoranda of Understanding regarding, contract language which preserve the basic rights of the parties.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior 1. On April 15 or the week thereafter of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires, both parties shall begin to meet and negotiate in good faith on negotiable items for the following budget year. Any agreement reached between the parties shall be reduced to writing and signed by them. 2. The Board of Education and the Association may discharge their respective duties required by this Agreement by means of authorized officers, individual representatives or committees. 3. Negotiations shall take place at mutually agreeable times and places. 4. Either party may request relevant reports from the other party. 5. As soon as available, the Board of Education shall furnish the Association with the placement of personnel on the respective salary schedules as of October 1. 6. The District shall furnish the Association with requested public information that is necessary to the expiration Association in order to fulfill its role as exclusive representative. The District may levy a reasonable charge for such materials. 7. All items upon which there is tentative agreement during joint negotiations shall be signed by the parties as tentative agreements. Ratification of this the successor agreement shall proceed after the following requirements have been met: A. The parties shall jointly assemble the tentative agreements into one original finalized Agreement document, draft of which each party shall have one true photocopy, while the original shall be jointly delivered into the custody of the Fresno, California Office of the Cali- fornia Conciliation Service.‌ B. The California Conciliation Service shall make two true photocopies of the original finalized Master Agreement document and retain them in their custody for signature by the parties after both parties have completed ratification procedures. The expense of such duplication shall be borne equally by the parties. C. Within three days after both parties have ratified the Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations shall meet to sign the original Agreement document draft described in paragraph ?7.A.” immediately above, and the two true photocopies described in paragraph ?7.B.” immediately above. Each party shall then be provided with one signed true photocopy and the original Agreement document draft shall be utilized for a new printing of the Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions as described in the provisions of employment of employees covered by the article ?Miscellaneous” within this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.###

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this Agreementagreement but of common concern to the parties shall be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this agreement, upon request by either party to the other. The parties undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings within 30 days of receipt of notice, setting forth generally the subject not specifically covered, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. Contract negotiations shall commence each year hereafter by a notice mailed or delivered by the Association to the Board on or before March 1st setting forth, without limitation, the request of the Association for items to be negotiated. C. In any negotiations described in this articleSection, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating negotiation or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtparty. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public mediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. EMPLOYMENT RELATIONSHIPS Section 2.1 ASSOCIATION AND TEACHER RIGHTS Pursuant to Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoPublic Acts of 1965, who are employees the Board hereby agrees that every teacher shall have the right freely to organize, join and support an association for the purpose of engaging in collective bargaining or negotiations and other concerted activities for mutual aid and protection. As a duly elected body exercising governmental power under color of law of the EmployerState of Michigan, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree Board undertakes and agrees that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during it will not directly or indirectly discourage or deprive or coerce any teacher in the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment enjoyment of any new position rights conferred by Act 379 or other laws of Michigan or the Constitution of Michigan and the United States; that it will not discriminate against any teacher with respect to hours, wages, or any terms or conditions of employment by reason of his membership in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet or collective professional negotiations with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing Board, or his institution of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meetingany grievance, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of complaint or proceeding under this agreement may be reopenedor otherwise with respect to any terms or conditions of employment.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Contract

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At Renegotiation of the Agreement shall be commenced at least sixty three (603) days months prior to the expiration of this Agreementthe current agreement. Such negotiations shall include, but not limited to, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees subjects covered by this Agreement. B. In Agreement and any negotiations described in this article, neither party other matters mutually agreed to be negotiable by the parties. Any Agreement shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party be reduced to writing and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification signed by the Board and the Association. . B. The parties mutually pledge Board agrees that representatives selected by each Association members, a maximum of four (4) Officers two (2) Family Support Specialists and two (2) JROTC engaged during the school day in negotiations on behalf of the Association with the Board during the term of this Agreement shall be clothed with necessary power and authority entitled to make proposals and concessions in released time without loss of salary; provided the course Association agrees to meet for purposes of negotiations, subject negotiations on off-duty time at least to the same extent as on released time. This is to apply only to such ultimate ratificationduring the scheduled school year. C. If During negotiations or for the parties fail purpose of assisting the Association in developing accurate, informed and constructive proposals concerning the rates of pay, wages, hours of work and other conditions of employment for Bargaining Unit employees, the Board shall provide the Association with documents relating to reach an agreement in financial resources, budgetary requirements and allocations and any such negotiations, either party may invoke other related information which is presented to any regular and/or special meetings called by the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedBoard to conduct official business or to any other governmental body. D. Members If the negotiations described in this section (A. above) have reached an impasse the procedure described in Act 379 of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees Michigan Public Acts of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours1965 will be/ followed. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during This Agreement incorporates the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established Agreement reached by the group parties on all agreed issues, which were subjects of negotiation. During the term of this Agreement, neither party will be required to negotiate with respect to any such matter whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the parties at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved time they negotiated or until deleted by mutual agreementsigned this Agreement. F. Prior to This Agreement may be altered, changed, added to, deleted from or modified only through the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unitvoluntary, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of the parties, in writing, and signed by both parties any section of as an amendment to this agreement may be reopenedAgreement.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior The Board agrees to participate in good faith negotiations with the expiration duly designated representative of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The Board and the Association agree that it is their responsibility to negotiate in good faith. Prior to the time set for entering into the process of negotiations, the Board, through the Superintendent, and the Association, through its President, shall each designate in writing the names of not more than five (5) persons who shall serve on their respective negotiating teams and be responsible for negotiations pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement. Each party shall also designate the person on their team who will be the chairman or chief negotiator. If either party finds it necessary to change members of the team during negotiations, they shall so inform the other party in writing. In the interest of providing a situation whereby maximum progress can be made during negotiations, each party agrees to keep changes as minimal as possible. To facilitate the orderly process of negotiations, either party may employ legal counsel or any state or national association representative of their choosing for consultative purposes during negotiations sessions. Further, each party may have professional employees of the District present during negotiation sessions for consultative purposes. However, not more than three (3) consultants per party, both legal and professional, may be present in a given negotiations session. At the beginning of each negotiating year the parties may mutually pledge agree that representatives selected sessions may or may not be recorded. The agreement shall remain in effect until both parties ratify the entire package. Negotiations will only be conducted in regular negotiation sessions at times, dates, and places mutually agreed upon by the parties. The time, date, place, and agenda will be set by mutual agreement of the parties prior to the close of each negotiation session. Negotiation sessions shall be clothed scheduled at times which will not interfere with the teacher workday and the educational programs of the District. Both parties agree that it is their mutual responsibility to confer upon their respective representatives the necessary power and authority to make proposals, to consider proposals and concessions counter proposals in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail and to reach an agreement in any such negotiationstentative agreements which shall be presented respectively to the Board and Association for ratification. The Board and the Association may discharge their respective duties by means of authorized officers, individuals, representatives, or committees, provided that the Board shall not select a teacher, herein defined, as its representative. Between March 1 and March 31 of each year, either party the Association or the Board shall submit a written request for negotiations to commence to the other party, if it desires there to be negotiations for that year. If no such request is made during the time period above, negotiations will not take place for the ensuing year, and all previous negotiated items shall remain in force. If a request to negotiate is initiated by either party, then a meeting shall be held on May 15, or a mutually agreeable date, to exchange proposals. Subsequent proposals may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members only be submitted upon mutual agreement of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees parties. All items shall be disposed of by one of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours.following methods: E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain a) Agreement on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementitem; b) Sending the item to impasse; or c) Agreement to withdraw the item. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Negotiated Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty six (606) days months prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will Board agrees to begin negotiations for with the UTF concerning a new successor Agreement, in accordance with the procedures set forth herein. Any Agreement covering wagesso negotiated shall apply to all teachers, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered shall be reduced to writing and signed by this Agreementthe Board and the UTF. B. In any negotiations described in this articleAgreement, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside without the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and by the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in membership of the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratificationUTF. C. If At the first official meeting of the respective bargaining teams the parties fail shall mutually establish negotiation ground rules which shall specifically describe the agreed upon process for the negotiation of a successor agreement to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedMaster Teacher Contract. D. Members Once a tentative agreement is reached, both bargaining teams agree to present and strongly recommend to their respective governing bodies acceptance of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees tentative Agreement. E. This Agreement incorporates the entire understanding of the Employerparties on all issues which were or could have been subject to negotiation. During the term of this Agreement neither party shall be required to negotiate with respect to any such matter whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the parties at the time they negotiated or signed this Agreement. F. When it is mutually agreed that negotiations referred to in Paragraph A between the UTF and the Board shall take place during the school day, any teacher so engaged shall be released from their normal regular duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might besalary. G. By In the event the negotiations described in Paragraph A above reach an impasse, the procedure described in Act 379 of the Michigan Public Acts of 1965, as amended from time to time, shall be followed when requested by either party. H. In order to promote and continue the cooperative atmosphere between teachers and administrators, the Board and UTF agree to establish a continuing Joint Labor/Management Committee to meet regularly to address mutual consent concerns. The Joint Labor/Management Committee will be equally representative, composed of six (6) members appointed respectively by both parties any section the UTF and the Board. A two-day training and organizational meeting of this agreement may committee shall be reopenedheld no later than September 30 of each year. The Joint Labor/Management Committee will determine its own charter and purpose. The Joint Labor/Management Committee shall have authority to adopt revisions to contract language which preserve the basic rights of the parties.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior The parties agree to enter into collective negotiations in accordance with Chapter 303, Public Laws of 1968, as amended by Chapter 123, P.L. 1974, in a good faith effort to reach an Agreement on matters concerned with the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of administrative employees’ employment and grievance procedures. Such negotiation shall begin not later than ten (10) school days after written request by the Association to the Board. Any Agreement so negotiated shall apply to all administrative personnel in the unit, be reduced to writing, and be signed by the Board and the Association. During negotiations, the Board and the Association shall present relevant data, exchange points of employees covered by this Agreement. B. In view and make proposals and counter-proposals. The Board agrees to make available to the Association, in response to reasonable requests, any public information or other information to which the Association is legally entitled. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party party. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives shall be authorized to make proposals, consider proposals, and each party make counterproposals in the course of negotiations; however, final authority to approve proposals shall rest with the Board of Education and the Bloomfield Principals’ Association. The representatives of the Board and the representatives of the Association’s negotiating committee shall met upon request for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the Agreement, and to resolve problems that may select its representatives from within or outside arise. These meetings are not intended to bypass the school districtgrievance procedure. It is recognized that no final Agreement All meetings between the parties may shall be executed without ratification scheduled to take place at a mutually convenient time. Should a mutually acceptable amendment to this Agreement be negotiated by the parties, it shall be reduced to writing and submitted to the Board and to the Association for consideration. This Agreement represents and incorporates the complete and final understanding of the parties and the settlement of all bargainable issues which were, or could have been, the subject of negotiations. During the term of this Agreement, neither party shall be required to negotiate over any matter whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either both parties at the time they negotiated or signed this Agreement. This Agreement shall not be modified in whole or in part, nor shall additional items be added by the parties except by an amendment in writing approved by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to Board and the Association cannot reach an agreement in any such negotiationsAgreement, then either party may invoke request that the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, matter shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of referred to the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problemsNew Jersey Public Employment Relations Commission advisory mediation. The topics for these meetings mediator shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted selected by mutual agreementAgreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Employment Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty 2.2.1 Committee Membership - Three (603) days prior to members of the expiration Board of this AgreementEducation, the parties will begin negotiations for Superintendent or his designated representative, and four (4) representatives of the Momence Education Association shall constitute a new Agreement covering wagesjoint negotiating committee. One (1) Momence Education Association member shall come from the high school, hoursone (1) from the junior high, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementone (1) from Jeneir Elementary School. The fourth (4th) member shall be elected at large. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection 2.2.2 Meetings - Regular meetings of the negotiating representatives committee shall be held at times agreeable to both parties. Bargaining for a successor agreement shall begin no earlier than February 1 of the other party last year of this agreement, unless both parties agree to begin earlier. Formal negotiations in regard to salary and each party contractual obligations must begin no later than the February meeting. Free and open exchange of view is necessary. Facts, opinions, and proposals shall be exchanged freely during the meetings in an effort to reach mutual understanding and agreement on matters of mutual concern. Preliminary meetings may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement be held between the parties Superintendent and the Momence Education Association representatives, or between the Superintendent and the Board of Education to clarify issues and exchange information. This may be executed without ratification requested by either party. 2.2.3 Information - The Superintendent and the administrative staff may serve as resource consultants and shall furnish copies of the budget, school district financial reports, Board salary proposals, and such readily available and pertinent information as the Momence Education Association may request. Nothing here-in shall require the central administrative office to search and assemble information. The Momence Education Association shall furnish copies of any pertinent information as reasonably requested by the Superintendent or the Board of Education. 2.2.4 Scope of 1'legotiations - The �Aomence Education J\ssociation and the Association. The parties mutually pledge Board of Education agree that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification.in good faith, shall encompass all or some aspects of policy covering the following items: C. If a) Salaries b) Fringe benefits c) Conditions of employment d) Grievance procedures e) Negotiation procedures f) Other mutually agreed upon matters which directly affect the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members quality of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, educational program and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.professional service

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Teachers' Contract

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days 2-1 The parties agree to enter into collective negotiations over a successor Agreement in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 123, Public Laws of 1974; such negotiations shall apply to the unit defined in Article I, be reduced to writing, be ratified by the Association, be approved by the Board, and be signed by the Association and the Board. 2-2 Representatives of both the Board and the Association agree that their members shall be given full authority to negotiate, but not to contract prior to ratification by the expiration of this Agreementbargaining unit and approval by the Board. 2-3 During negotiations, the parties will begin negotiations Board and the Association shall present relevant data, exchange points of view and make proposals and counter-proposals. The Board shall make available to the Association for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementinspection at reasonable times that information which is available to the public. B. In 2-4 Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party. 2-5 Pursuant to Chapter 123, Public Laws of 1974, the Board agrees not to negotiate concerning said employees in the negotiating unit as defined in Article I of this Agreement, with any organization other than the Association for the duration of this Agreement. 2-6 During the term of this Agreement, neither party shall be required to negotiate with respect to any such matter, whether or not covered by this Agreement, and each party may select its representatives from whether or not within the knowledge or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between contemplation of either or both of the parties may at the time they negotiated or executed this Agreement. 2-7 This Agreement shall not be executed without ratification modified in whole or in part by the Board parties except by an instrument in writing duly executed by both parties. 2-8 This Agreement represents and incorporates the Associationcomplete and final understanding and settlement by the parties of all negotiable issues, which were or could have been the subject of negotiations. During the term of this Agreement, neither party will be required to negotiate with respect to any such matter, whether or not covered by this Agreement, and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either or both of the parties at the time they negotiated or signed this Agreement. The parties mutually pledge agree that representatives selected by during the negotiations resulting in this Agreement, each shall be clothed with necessary power party had the unlimited right and authority opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any term and concessions in the course condition of negotiations, subject only employment as to such ultimate ratification. C. If which the parties fail are obligated to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedcollectively negotiate. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least Upon ratification of the Master Agreement, the Association shall not bring up matters for negotiation to the Board and the Board will not bring up matters to the Association except by written mutual consent and as provided in Sections B and L of this ARTICLE and ARTICLE XIV, Section C. B. Within one hundred twenty (120) days, but not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, and upon written notice by the Association, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleARTICLE, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its six (6) representatives and two (2) alternates from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by both parties, but the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either D. Either party may at any time invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members of E. All negotiation meetings will be held in a room(s) mutually agreed upon by the chief negotiators for the Board and Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, . F. All negotiation meetings will be closed to all persons who are employees not duly appointed representatives or alternates under this ARTICLE. Each team, with as much notice as possible may bring in consultants for the purpose of aiding in the Employernegotiation of specific proposals. G. All negotiation meetings will be set as to time, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings duration and agenda by mutual agreement of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourschief negotiators. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings H. There shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted no release of information concerning opposition proposals and/or tentative agreements, except by mutual agreement, and except to acquire technical information relative to specific proposals, and except that the chief negotiator for the Board may brief the Board and the chief negotiator for the Association may brief the members of the Association relative to progress in negotiations. However, should the parties reach impasse, this rule shall cease to operate with respect to tentative agreements and proposals on the table at that time. F. Prior I. All agreements shall be tentative pending final agreement on an entire tentative contract by the negotiating representatives for both sides. J. Each team shall have on the table at all times a set of proposals, which if agreed to by the establishment other team along with all tentative contract agreements in effect, shall constitute an entire tentative contract. K. Notwithstanding the expiration of any this Agreement, the negotiation procedures outlined in this ARTICLE shall be in effect until a successor agreement is negotiated and ratified. 2010 - 2011 Level Paid Days Weeks Worked Position A 220 44 Middle School Assistant Principal 225 45 Assistant Director of Community Education 225 45 Director, Vocational Education 225 45 Asst. Director of Curriculum and Instruction B 225 45 Associate High School Principal 220 44 Elementary Principal 225 225 45 45 Associate Director, Developmental Learning Program Director, Secondary Special Needs 225 45 Director, Federal Projects and Research C 230 46 Director of Community Education 225 45 Middle School Principal 225 225 45 45 Director, Developmental Learning Program Director of Student Services D 230 46 High School Principal 230 46 Director of Curriculum and Instruction 230 46 Director of Special Services 230 46 Director of Employee Benefits and Transportation Operations 1 MA AND 0 YRS 76,878 78,383 83,767 87,963 1 MA + 15 HRS AND 0 YRS 78,145 79,650 85,033 89,309 1 MA + 30 HRS AND 0 YRS 79,412 80,916 86,300 90,655 1 ED SPEC AND 0 YRS 80,679 82,183 87,567 92,001 1 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 0 YRS 81,946 83,529 88,913 93,347 2 MA AND 1 YRS 80,204 81,787 87,171 91,763 2 MA + 15 HRS AND 1 YRS 81,550 83,054 88,517 93,188 2 MA + 30 HRS AND 1 YRS 82,817 84,400 89,863 94,534 2 ED SPEC AND 1 YRS 84,083 85,746 91,209 95,959 2 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 1 YRS 85,429 87,092 92,476 97,305 3 MA AND 2 YRS 83,608 85,270 90,733 95,642 3 MA + 15 HRS AND 2 YRS 84,954 86,616 92,159 97,067 3 MA + 30 HRS AND 2 YRS 86,300 87,962 93,504 98,492 3 ED SPEC AND 2 YRS 87,646 89,387 94,850 99,918 3 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 2 YRS 88,992 90,733 96,196 101,343 4 MA AND 3 YRS 87,092 88,834 94,376 99,601 4 MA + 15 HRS AND 3 YRS 88,517 90,180 95,801 101,027 4 MA + 30 HRS AND 3 YRS 89,863 91,605 96,672 102,531 4 ED SPEC AND 3 YRS 91,209 93,030 98,651 104,035 4 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 3 YRS 92,634 94,455 99,997 105,460 5 MA AND 4 YRS 88,517 90,180 95,801 101,027 5 MA + 15 HRS AND 4 YRS 89,863 91,605 97,226 102,531 5 MA + 30 HRS AND 4 YRS 91,209 93,030 98,651 104,035 5 ED SPEC AND 4 YRS 92,634 94,455 99,997 105,460 5 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 4 YRS 93,980 95,880 101,422 106,965 6 MA AND 5 YRS 89,863 91,605 97,226 102,531 6 MA + 15 HRS AND 5 YRS 91,209 93,030 98,651 104,035 6 MA + 30 HRS AND 5 YRS 92,634 94,455 99,997 105,460 6 ED SPEC AND 5 YRS 93,980 95,880 101,422 106,965 6 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 5 YRS 95,326 97,305 102,848 108,390 7 MA AND 6 YRS 91,209 93,030 98,651 104,035 7 MA + 15 HRS AND 6 YRS 92,634 94,455 99,997 105,460 7 MA + 30 HRS AND 6 YRS 93,980 95,880 101,422 106,965 7 ED SPEC AND 6 YRS 95,405 97,305 102,848 108,390 7 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 6 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 8 MA AND 7 YRS 92,634 94,455 99,997 105,460 8 MA + 15 HRS AND 7 YRS 93,980 95,880 101,422 106,965 8 MA + 30 HRS AND 7 YRS 95,405 97,305 102,848 108,390 8 ED SPEC AND 7 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 8 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 7 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 9 MA AND 8 YRS 93,980 95,880 101,422 106,965 9 MA + 15 HRS AND 8 YRS 95,405 97,305 102,848 108,390 9 MA + 30 HRS AND 8 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 9 ED SPEC AND 8 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 9 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 8 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 10 MA AND 9 YRS 95,405 97,305 102,848 108,390 10 MA + 15 HRS AND 9 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 10 MA + 30 HRS AND 9 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 10 ED SPEC AND 9 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 10 ED.D. OR PH.D. AND 9 YRS 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 11 10 YRS OR MORE 96,751 98,651 104,273 109,894 *12 11 YRS/MORE &ED. SP. 102,335 104,363 110,044 115,807 *12 11 YRS/MORE & PH.D. 103,796 105,824 111,506 117,267 Base: 79,174 Each administrator shall have group term life insurance coverage in an amount equal to three (3) times his/her annual contractual salary and group term dependent life insurance coverage as listed below. The premiums for such insurances shall be paid by each administrator through payroll deduction semi-annually. At the same time, the Board shall reimburse each administrator for such semi-annual premium payment as additional salary. Lives of dependent children - $10,000 each child 14 days to 19 years old (extended to 23 years if full-time college student) Life of spouse $10,000 Hospitalization and Major Medical Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses and/or Dependent Children Effective July 1, 2007 the Community Blue 1 PPO with a $10/$20 prescription coverage rider. Sickness - 7 work days or the exhaustion of accumulated sick leave, whichever occurs last Worker's Compensation - after forty (40) weeks Benefit: 66 2/3% of members’ highest salary not to exceed maximum of $6,000. Including survivor benefit. Maximum Benefit Period: Accident - Age 65 Sickness - Age 65 Type of coverage - 24 hour Integration with other income benefits: 1. Worker's Compensation 2. Michigan Public School Employees' Retirement Fund 3. Social Security - Family 4. Any employer-sponsored disability or retirement plan **Eliminate, for new position hires, short-term disability and shorten qualifying period for LTD from 180 to 90 calendar days – will only go into effect if GCEA agrees to same conditions. For members hired into the District after ratification of this contract. Dental Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses, and/or Dependent Children Administrators who have dual dental insurance coverage as a consequence of their spouse's employment either with the Board or elsewhere shall receive Blue Cross 50-50-50 coverage. Dental Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses, and/or Dependent Children - Continued The coverage will be as follows: Blue Cross Dental CR-RC-10-10 MBL $1,500 OS-10 MBL 2500 Class I 100% Oral Examinations, X-rays, Flouride Treatments, Cleanings, Emergency First Aid Treatment Class II 90% Restorative, Extractions, Root Canals, Etc. Class III 90% Dentures, Bridges Class IV 100% Orthodontic Rider - $2,500 lifetime benefit Vision Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses, and/or Dependent Children The Board shall provide a group vision insurance program with the following annual benefits per administrators, dependent spouses, or dependent child (each) Benefits Plan II Examination 100% of reasonable & customary Single Vision Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Bi-focal Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Tri-focal Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Lenticular Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Frames 100% of reasonable & customary Contact Lenses $40.00 per lens. 100% of customary and reasonable charges is paid if visual acuity of the patient is not correctable to 20/70 in the bargaining unitbetter eye with conventional lenses, the Employer shall notify the Association but can be corrected to 20/70. An examination, frame and one pair of such corrective lenses (including prescription sunglasses, photogray lenses, or contact lenses) will be provided once in a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload 12-month plan year for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing each eligible member of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meetingfamily. Eligible bargaining unit members not electing health insurance will receive $100 per month ($1,200 per year), the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period in lieu of time to determine what a reasonable workload might behealth insurance. G. By mutual consent NOTES: 1. Administrators on approved leave may continue to carry the same coverage by paying group rates. Payments to begin within thirty (30) days from beginning of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopenedleave.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Contract Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement, or those covered by this Agreement and of common concern, shall be subject to professional negotiations during the period of this Agreement upon written notice to the other party. Within sixty days, the parties shall undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. In the event the salary schedule is reopened for negotiations, by either party, as provided in Article IV of this Agreement, the parties will promptly negotiate for the purpose of reaching an agreement upon a revised salary schedule. C. At least sixty (60) one hundred and twenty days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. D. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives or bargaining representative of the other party and each party may select its representatives representative from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties Board and the Staff may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board and by a majority of the membership of the Staff, but the Board and the Association. The parties Staff mutually pledge that representatives the representative selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. E. If the parties Board and the Staff fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke enter into the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation process of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty Any time after January 1, preceding the expiration date of the contract, either party may initiate negotiations for the purpose of entering into a successor agreement. The first meeting shall take place no later than thirty (6030) days prior following such request to begin negotiations. Representatives of the expiration of this Agreement, Chelsea Education Association will inform the parties will begin Michigan Employment Relations Commission (MERC) when negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementcommence. B. In Each party may have up to five (5) representatives on their negotiations team, unless changed by mutual agreement. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Associationparty. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all the necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations. Both parties agree to submit the final agreement for ratification of their appropriate governing bodies. It is understood and agreed that neither body is obligated to ratify the final agreement submitted by the bargaining teams. After ratification by both parties, subject only their representatives shall attach their signatures to such ultimate the ratified agreement within ten (10) days of ratification. C. If Any agreement to alter the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke contract must be approved by the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedBoard and the CEA. D. Members A. If an employee is to be advanced on the salary schedules (steps, lane changes, and/or raises, or to be paid a longevity annuity per Article XVI, Section 2: E.1), they must have completed a full year of professional employment in the Chelsea School District, or if hired after the start of the Associationschool year must have been hired prior to January 1, and have obtained an evaluation rating of effective or highly effective during the previous school year. NCPS that have not received a satisfactory evaluation will have been placed on an Individual Development Plan (IDP) (Appendix D-4) to address the area(s) of concern. The IDP must be signed and implemented for at least 60 days for a probationary NCPS if the salary schedule advance is affected. For a non-probationary NCPS, the IDP must be signed and implemented by January 1 if the salary schedule advance is affected for the following school year. B. An employee’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoplacement on the salary schedule, who are employees as determined at the commencement of the Employerschool year, shall not be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly subject to change during the school year to attempt to resolve problemsregardless of when a given employee completes course work. The topics for these meetings employee must have obtained those credit hours necessary to entitle the employee to placement on the MA or EdS salary schedule before September 15 of the school year in which the advancement is to be made. Further, a transcript of completed credits is required as evidence and must be presented to the Superintendent before an employee is placed on the MA or EdS salary schedule. An employee seeking placement on an advanced-degree schedule (MA or EdS/PhD) must have a degree granted from a college or university accredited by the applicable regional accrediting agency or through a degree program approved by the Board. C. All salary figures are rounded up or down to the nearest whole dollar. 2.) 1% Off schedule stipend to be paid equally during the 2023-2024 school year. Excess fund equity - 80% of fund equity as listed in the 2024, 2025 & 2026 audits on the balance sheet general fund above 18% shall be established by used for compensation district-wide. • ⅔ to Members covered in CBA & ⅓ to other CSD employees • paid out in December 2024, 2025, & 2026 1.) 1% Off schedule stipend to be paid equally during the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement2024-2025 school year. F. Prior to 2.) Excess Fund Equity – (see above) 1. Excess Fund Equity – (see above) 2. For the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit2025/26 school years, should district enrollment vary from estimates used for budgeting purposes, the Employer shall notify following formula will be used to calculate an amount to be distributed to employees as a lump sum bonus payment. The lump sum payment will not be subject to retirement and will be reduced by FICA taxes. *If the Association of such a contemplated actionper pupil allocation during the 2025/26 school year is greater than or equal to $9,900, and meet an off-scale payment will be distributed in accordance with the Association to negotiate workload for the positionformula defined below. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. *If the timing of per pupil allocation during the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting2025/26 school year is lower than $9,899 no additional off scale payment will be made. Foundation Allowance *(Actual Blended Enrollment (Spring 2025 and Fall 2025) - Projected Blended Enrollment) *50% Class Advisor .02 Student Council .06 NHS .03 Prom Advisor .03 Interact .02 Key Club .02 Yearbook .06 Link Crew .025 One Act .03 School Store .02 Newspaper .04 Robotics (K-12 Advisor) .05 Robotics (K-5 Assistant Advisor) .02 Building Chairperson – Science, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.Social Studies, Math, English .03 Musical .06 Musical Orchestra Director .02 Show Choir .04 Fall Color Guard .03 Winter Color Guard .03 Alternative Styles Music Director .04 Theater Guild Advisor .02 Arbor Club .02 SCHEDULE B2 – EXTRA-CURRICULAR Student Council Washington, DC Trip Coordinator Yearbook Quiz Bowl Building Chairperson – Science, Social Studies, Math, English Drama Art Club WEB .02 .02 .05 .02 .03 .03 .02 .02 Sixth Grade Camp .01 Student Council .01 Grade Level Chairs (including Y5's) .03

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this Agreement but of common concern to the parties shall be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this agreement upon request by either party to the other. The parties undertake to time during the period to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the Agreement the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articlethe Article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If an emergency financial manager is appointed by the parties fail to reach an state under the Fiscal Accountability Act, the emergency manager may reject, modify, or terminate the collective bargaining agreement in his/her sole discretion. This authority is a prohibited subject of bargaining under the Public Employment Relations Act (PERA). Section 2.1 TEACHERS RIGHTS X. Xxxxxxxx to Act 379 of the Public Acts of 1965, the Board hereby agrees that every employee of the board shall have the right to freely organize, join and support the Association for the purpose of engaging in collective bargaining or negotiation or other concerted activities for mutual aid and protection or to refrain from such activity. The Board undertakes and agrees that it will not directly or indirectly discourage or deprive or coerce any such negotiationsteacher in the enjoyment of any rights conferred by Act 379 or other laws of Michigan or the Constitutions of Michigan and the United States; that it will not discriminate against any teacher with respect to hours, either party may wages, or any terms or conditions of employment by reason of his/her membership in the Association, his/her participation in any activities of the Association or collective professional negotiations with the Board, or his/her institution of any grievance, complaint or proceeding under this Agreement or otherwise with respect to any terms or conditions of employment or the teacher’s nonparticipation in Association activities. B. The Board specifically recognizes the right of its employees appropriately to invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 assistance of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission, or a mediator from such public agency, or an arbitrator appointed pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement, and the Board agrees to the bound by any lawful order or award thereof. C. The Board agrees to furnish to the Association in response to reasonable requests from time to time, public information concerning the financial resources of the district, tentative budgetary requirements and allocations and such other information as amendedwill assist the Association in developing intelligent, accurate, informed and constructive programs on behalf of the teachers and their students, together with the information which may be necessary for the Association to process any grievance or complaint. The Association shall reimburse the district in accordance with FOIA. D. Members A teacher will have the right to review the contents of all records, excluding initial references, of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretodistrict pertaining to said teacher, who are employees originating after initial employment and to have a representative of the EmployerAssociation accompany him/her in such review. E. No material, including but not limited to, student, parental, or school personnel complaints originating after initial employment will be places in his/her personnel file unless the teacher has had an opportunity to review the material. Complaints against the teacher shall be put in writing with the names of the complainants, administrative action taken, and remedy clearly stated. The teacher may submit a written notation regarding any material including complaints, and the same shall be attached to the file copy of the material in question within ten (10) days. If the material to be placed in the file is inappropriate or in error, the material will be corrected or expunged from the file, whichever is appropriate. When a teacher is requested to sign material placed in the file, such signature shall be understood to indicate his/her awareness of the material but shall not be interpreted to mean agreement with the content of the material. All recommendations, written or oral, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings based solely on the contents of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursteacher’s personnel file. E. F. The parties hereby agree Board agrees that it will in no way discriminate against or between employees covered by this agreement because of their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings race, creed, religion, color, national origin or ancestry, age, sex, marital status, physical characteristics, or place of residence. G. A bargaining unit member shall be established entitled to have present a representative of the Association during any meeting in which they feel their presence may prove helpful. When a request for such representation is made, no action shall be taken with respect to the teacher until such representative of the Association is present, provided it does not delay the meeting by more than one school day. Should action occur, as a result of a given meeting, the group at teacher shall be advised immediately of said possibility and be advised of the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on right to representation under this provision of the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior X. The Board further agrees that all employment records regarding medical, counseling or psychological records shall not be released to third parties absent the establishment written consent of any new position the employee or as required by law. The Board further agrees that in the bargaining unitevent a request is made by a third party for such records, the Employer Board shall promptly notify the Association employee and the Association. I. The provisions of such a contemplated action, and meet with this article shall not prevent the Association from having access to negotiate workload for any employment records reasonably related to its duties as the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beexclusive bargaining representative. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.Section 2.2 TEACHER ASSIGNMENTS

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Contract

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. Section 18.1 At least sixty ninety (6090) days prior to the expiration of this Agreementwritten agreement, the parties will likewise begin negotiations for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, and terms and conditions of employment of employees covered for para educators employed by this Agreementthe District. B. Section 18.2 In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall will have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its or bargaining representatives from within or outside the school districtDistrict. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and by the membership of the Association. The However, the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and to make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. Section 18.3 The parties will deal with the selected representatives of each, not with individuals. Section 18.4 The Association and the District agree there will be no reprisals, subtle or otherwise, as a result of participation in Avondale collective bargaining negotiations. Section 18.5 If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members Section 18.6 The Association and the District acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect to any subject or matter not removed by law from the area of collective bargaining and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity, are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the District and the Association for the life of this Agreement each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waives the right and each agrees that the other will not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter referred to or covered by this Agreement, even though such subject or matter may not have been within the knowledge and contemplation of either or both of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of parties at the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourstime they negotiated or signed this Agreement. E. Section 18.7 The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the request of either party they will commence negotiation to modify or change this agreement as may be required or desirable because of changes in the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established code or other state law enacted by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementMichigan Legislature. F. Prior to Section 18.8 This Agreement supersedes and cancels all previous Agreements, verbally or written, or based on alleged past practices between the establishment of any new position in District and the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated actionAssociation, and meet with constitutes the Association to negotiate workload for entire agreement between the positionparties. This provision does Any amendment or agreement supplemental hereto will not preclude the Employer’s ability to create be binding on either party unless executed in writing by each party and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beattached hereto. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior It is contemplated that matters not specifically covered by this agreement but of common concern to the expiration parties shall be subject to professional negotiations between them from time to time during the period of this AgreementAgreement upon mutual consent. The parties undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for such discussions, furnishing necessary information, and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. In the event the salary schedule is re-opened for negotiations by either party, if and when provided in this agreement, the parties will begin promptly negotiate for the purpose of reaching an agreement upon a revised salary schedule. In the year in which the contract will expire the parties will start the negotiations process no later than March 1, for a new Agreement agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered teachers employed by this Agreementthe Board. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by a majority of the membership of the Association. The , but the parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsnegotiation, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree recognize that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during principals, the school year to attempt to resolve problemsSuperintendent and other supervisory, administrative and executive officials are excluded from the bargaining unit. The topics for these meetings shall be established by Association agrees that it will neither take nor threaten to take any reprisals, directly or indirectly, against any such supervisory or executive officials because of any decision, actions, or statement made either personally or in the group at course of their official duty relative to collective bargaining, the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possibleadministration of this Agreement, or the educational policies of the Board. Topics The Board and the Administration agrees that they will remain on neither take nor threaten to take any reprisals, directly or indirectly, against the agendas until resolved Association nor any member thereof because of any decisions, actions, or until deleted by mutual agreementstatements made either personally or in the course of their official duty relative to collective bargaining. F. Prior The parties agree to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such form a contemplated action, and meet subcommittee to continue negotiations with the Association objective of taking such actions as may be necessary to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet comply with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed Revised School Code in regards to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beevaluation and merit pay. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty Negotiating Teams 1. The Board and the Association shall each designate in writing, at the first negotiating session, the names of not more than six (606) days prior persons who shall serve as their respective representatives for negotiations pursuant to the expiration provisions of this Agreementagreement. The representatives of the Board shall be presently serving on the Board or employed by the Board, or be an employee of an agency contracted by the parties Board to negotiate contracts and the representatives of the Association shall be presently members of the bargaining unit or statewide Association staff members. Each party shall designate the person on its team who will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wagesserve as the spokesperson. Neither party shall attempt to exert influence over the other party's selection of representatives. Each party may also designate up to three (3) alternates who may attend negotiation sessions only when serving in the place of an absent regular team member. In addition, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered each party may designate two (2) observers who may be permitted to attend negotiation sessions by this Agreementmutual consent. 2. Each team's spokesperson may designate any other team member to speak. B. In any Open Negotiations 1. Between April 1 and May 31 of each ensuing year, either the Association or the Board shall submit a written request for negotiations described to commence to the other party, if it desires there to be negotiations for that year. If no such request is made during the time period above, negotiations will not take place for the ensuing year. 2. All items under the negotiation shall be disposed in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection one of the negotiating representatives following ways: a. tentative agreement: b. withdrawal of the other party items: c. submission of the item to impasse. 3. Other meeting ground rules shall be set by mutual agreement by the parties. C. Tentative Agreement 1. Both parties agree that it is their mutual responsibility to empower their respective representative with the necessary authority to make proposals, to consider proposals and each party may select its representatives from within or outside to make counter proposal in the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between course of negotiations, and to reach tentative agreements subject to the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. 2. The When tentative agreement is reached by both parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each on any item, it shall be clothed with necessary power reduced to writing, and authority to make proposals be signed and concessions in dated by the course spokesperson of negotiationseach team. When tentative agreement is reached on all items, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, they shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established submitted first by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload the employees for ratification then by the position. This provision does not preclude Superintendent to the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload Board for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beratification. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least Upon ratification of the Master Agreement, the Association shall not bring up matters for negotiation to the Board and the Board will not bring up matters to the Association except by written mutual consent and as provided in Sections B and L of this ARTICLE and ARTICLE 14, Section C. B. Within one hundred twenty (120) days, but not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, and upon written notice by the Association, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleARTICLE, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its six (6) representatives and two (2) alternates from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by both parties, but the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either D. Either party may at any time invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members of E. All negotiation meetings will be held in a room(s) mutually agreed upon by the chief negotiators for the Board and Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, . F. All negotiation meetings will be closed to all persons who are employees not duly appointed representatives or alternates under this ARTICLE. Each team, with as much notice as possible may bring in consultants for the purpose of aiding in the Employernegotiation of specific proposals. G. All negotiation meetings will be set as to time, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings duration and agenda by mutual agreement of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourschief negotiators. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings H. There shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted no release of information concerning opposition proposals and/or tentative agreements, except by mutual agreement, and except to acquire technical information relative to specific proposals, and except that the chief negotiator for the Board may brief the Board and the chief negotiator for the Association may brief the members of the Association relative to progress in negotiations. However, should the parties reach impasse, this rule shall cease to operate with respect to tentative agreements and proposals on the table at that time. F. Prior I. All agreements shall be tentative pending final agreement on an entire tentative contract by the negotiating representatives for both sides. J. Each team shall have on the table at all times a set of proposals, which if agreed to by the other team along with all tentative contract agreements in effect, shall constitute an entire tentative contract. K. Notwithstanding the expiration of this Agreement, the negotiation procedures outlined in this ARTICLE shall be in effect until a successor agreement is negotiated and ratified. 2022-2023 Level Paid Days Weeks Worked Position A 219 44 Elementary Assistant Principal B 219 44 Elementary Principal 224 45 Middle School Assistant Principal Associate Director of Act 18 AI Program C 224 45 Associate High School Principal 224 45 Middle School Principal 224 45 Director of Act 18 AI Program of Act 18 AI Program 230 46 Director of Secondary Alternative Programming D 230 46 High School Principal 230 230 46 46 Director of Instructional Services and State and Federal Grants Director of Special Services 230 46 Director of Student Services ● A $2,000 activity stipend will be distributed evenly across 26 pay periods each year for the duration of this bargaining agreement Through the duration of this Agreement, parity will be exclusively applied to on-schedule compensation between the GCAA and the GCEA, in addition to any one-time off-schedule payments. It is understood this Agreement reflects the restoration of wage concessions for the GCAA that began with the 2015-2018 collective bargaining agreement, and continued through subsequent agreements with the 2018-2020 and 2020-2021 collective bargaining agreements. For purposes of parity, it will apply to any salary percentage increase and/or step increase (or “adjustment”) provided to the establishment GCEA that is in excess of any new position restorative levels established in the bargaining unit2014-2015 contract year. Additionally, parity will apply for any one-time off-schedule payments, not to include longevity or any similar stipends that are not considered “one-time.” For illustrative purposes, the Employer shall notify GCAA ended the Association of such 2020-2021 contract year with a contemplated action, and meet with five (5) percent on-schedule wage concession from the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions2014-2015 contract year. If the timing five (5) percent on-schedule wage concession is fully restored for the 2021-2022 contract year and, if the GCEA ended the 2020-2021 contract year with a three (3) percent wage concession from the 2014-2015 contract year, and received a four (4) percent on-schedule increase for the 2021-2022 contract year, equating to one (1) percent in excess of restorative wages, members of the decision to establish GCAA would receive an additional one (1) percent increase in wages above restoration from the position precludes such a meeting2014-2015 contract year. To calculate parity between the two bargaining groups, the Employer shall meet total increase will include all on-schedule and any one-time off-schedule increases between the two bargaining groups. Such a calculation will be determined not later than November 15, 2021, once it is determined if the GCAA is eligible for a fund balance payment, in accordance with the Association 2021-2022 Fund Balance Formula, as soon provided in this Agreement. Such a payment, as possiblea one-time off-schedule payment, would factor into the overall parity comparison between the two bargaining groups. The parties may agree Similarly, in the event step increases were negotiated with another bargaining unit that were not corresponding with any step increases provided to the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section GCAA during the life of this agreement may be reopenedcollective bargaining agreement, members of the GCAA would receive parity in keeping with such step increase(s).

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Contract Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, The terms and conditions of employment in this Agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of employees the special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern of the parties, which have not been fully or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters is provided. The parties accordingly undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for discussion, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. Not later than June 1, the Board agrees to negotiate with the Association over a possible Successor Agreement in accordance with the procedure set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach agreement concerning teachers’ salaries and all other conditions of their employment. Such negotiation will include, but not be limited to, the subjects covered by this AgreementAgreement and any other matters mutually agreed to be negotiable by the parties. Any agreement so negotiated will apply to all teachers, and will be reduced to writing and signed by the Board and the Association. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that While the Association and the Board shall execute no final Agreement between agreement without ratification, the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members mediation machinery of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursState Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to No later than February 1 preceding the expiration end of the stipulated duration of this Agreement, agreement the parties will begin enter into good faith negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions pursuant to the Public Employees Fair Employment Act with respect to an agreement successive to this one. Such negotiations are to be conducted in accordance with the following provisions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementarticle. B. In Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtSchool District. It is recognized that no final Agreement between Each party’s group or team of representatives for negotiations shall consist of not more than seven members. C. At the first meeting a specific place, day of the week, and time of day for subsequent negotiating sessions shall be agreed upon. Such place, day of week and time of day being thereafter subject to change only by mutual agreement or in an emergency. The second meeting shall occur not later than two weeks after the first meeting. The length of subsequent negotiation sessions shall be mutually determined at the first meeting. D. The second meeting will be an informal session. No negotiation packages will be exchanged at this time. Each side will be afforded the opportunity to present and fully discuss a list of possibilities for change/addition/deletion to the contract. This negotiation procedure will continue if agreed to by both sides. If, upon completion of the presentation and discussion of both packages, one side desires to change the process, then formal negotiations will begin. Complete negotiation packages will be exchanged in the same format as the existing agreement at the next session. Complete negotiation packages shall mean a document having all articles, by title, in which changes are to be proposed and containing all concepts which the party wishes to have considered during the negotiations. E. All negotiations will be conducted in closed session. F. Both parties may be executed without ratification by shall furnish each other, upon reasonable request, all available information pertinent to the Board and the Association. issues under consideration. G. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and concessions reach agreements in the course of negotiations. It is recognized, subject only however, that the negotiators for each party have been given guidelines and instructions by the party they represent and the negotiators cannot exceed such guidelines or instructions and must report, from time to such ultimate ratificationtime, to the party they represent or a committee thereof for further authorization or clarification. C. If H. The designated chief negotiators shall be the spokespersons for their respective parties. However, other members of the committee may direct questions through their chief negotiator. I. Once agreements have been reached on individual articles, they will be initialed by both parties and will be understood to stand as tentative agreements. J. When the negotiating teams reach a final total agreement it shall be submitted to the Association and the Superintendent. It is understood and agreed that such submission, together with accompanying recommendations for adoption will be supported by all members of the negotiating teams of the respective parties hereto. X. During the period of negotiations, and (a) prior to reaching an agreement to be submitted to the Superintendent and the Association, or (b) prior to impasse (whichever event shall first occur) the proceedings of the negotiations shall not be released to any of the public news media. L. If, during the course of negotiations the parties fail reach an impasse, or if they have failed to reach an agreement in any such negotiationson all topics under negotiation, the Public Employment Relations Board may be requested by either party may invoke to assist in the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members resolution of their differences in accordance with the provisions of Article 14, Section 209, of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursCivil Service Law. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Professional Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty Anytime after March 31st of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires either party may make a request to begin negotiations upon a successor agreement. Not later than thirty (6030) days following written notification of the request by one party upon the other, the initial meeting shall take place. This shall not prohibit the parties from mutually agreeing to enter into negotiations prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this AgreementMarch 31st. B. In any negotiations described in this articleArticle, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If It is recognized that no final agreement between the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke be executed without ratification by the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedBoard and by the Association. D. Members In order that students may obtain the full benefits of their instruction, it is agreed that all negotiations on behalf of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees Association with any representation of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working Board should take place after regular school hours. E. The minutes of each meeting will be kept by the respective sides for their own files. F. Articles negotiated will be "pending tentative agreement" at each session, and at the beginning of the next negotiation session these Articles will have been typed and reviewed by both parties hereby before "tentative agreement" is reached. If these Articles are acceptable, both Chief Negotiators will sign two (2) copies, one (1) for the Board and one (1) for the Association. G. Before each negotiation session officially adjourns, the agenda, time and place for the next session shall be mutually agreed upon by the Chief Negotiators. H. In order to create the best educational environment possible and to build trust, understanding and communication, the Board and the FREA agree that their Teams to establish an on-going labor/management committee. This committee shall be called “Partners In Education” (or the PIE Committee). Participants shall include the FREA Negotiations Team: Board Members who serve on the Board’s Negotiating Committee, the FREA President, the Superintendent, The Business Manager, one Building Principal, the Board’s Legal Representative, and the MEA Uniserv Director assigned to the FREA. This committee shall meet at least quarterly during once a month, when possible, and deal with issues of mutual interest, any items impacting the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall contract must be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior subject to the establishment appropriate procedures of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beeach party. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior The parties agree to enter into collective negotiations in accordance with Chapter 303, Public Laws of 1968, as amended by Chapter 123, P.L. 1974, in a good faith effort to reach an Agreement on matters concerned with the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of administrative employees’ employment of employees covered and grievance procedures. Such negotiation shall begin not later than ten (10) school days after written request by this Agreementthe Association to the Board. Any Agreement so negotiated shall apply to all administrative personnel in the unit, be reduced to writing, and be signed by the Board and the Association. B. In During negotiations, the Board and the Association shall present relevant data, exchange points of view and make proposals and counter-proposals. The Board agrees to make available to the Association, in response to reasonable requests, any public information or other information to which the Association is legally entitled. X. Xxxxxxx party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party party. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives shall be authorized to make proposals, consider proposals, and each party make counterproposals in the course of negotiations; however, final authority to approve proposals shall rest with the Board of Education and the Bloomfield Principals’ Association. D. The representatives of the Board and the representatives of the Association’s negotiating committee shall met upon request for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the Agreement, and to resolve problems that may select its representatives from within or outside arise. These meetings are not intended to bypass the school districtgrievance procedure. 1. It is recognized that no final Agreement All meetings between the parties may shall be executed without ratification scheduled to take place at a mutually convenient time. 2. Should a mutually acceptable amendment to this Agreement be negotiated by the parties, it shall be reduced to writing and submitted to the Board and to the Association for consideration. E. This Agreement represents and incorporates the complete and final understanding of the parties and the settlement of all bargainable issues which were, or could have been, the subject of negotiations. During the term of this Agreement, neither party shall be required to negotiate over any matter whether or not covered by this Agreement and whether or not within the knowledge or contemplation of either both parties at the time they negotiated or signed this Agreement. This Agreement shall not be modified in whole or in part, nor shall additional items be added by the parties except by an amendment in writing approved by the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. F. If the parties fail to Board and the Association cannot reach an agreement in any such negotiationsAgreement, then either party may invoke request that the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, matter shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of referred to the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problemsNew Jersey Public Employment Relations Commission advisory mediation. The topics for these meetings mediator shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted selected by mutual agreementAgreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Employment Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior It is agreed that the basic objectives of the negotiating procedure are to establish a written agreement between the expiration of this Agreement, Association and the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, Board. It is contemplated that terms and conditions of employment provided in this agreement, once ratified, shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of employees covered by this Agreementthe special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern to the parties which have not been frilly or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters be provided. The parties accordingly agree to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for discussion, furnishing the necessary information, and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. In No later than the first week in January of 2013, the parties will enter into good faith negotiations over a successor agreement covering the following school year. The Board and the Association will simultaneously exchange their complete set of proposals to initiate the formal negotiations process. If such an agreement is not concluded by the end of the first full week in March, either party may request the use of mediation services. The parties shall request assistance from the State Public Employment Relations Board. Such mediation services will be governed by the provisions of section 209 of the Civil Service Law. C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may respects the right of the other to select its representatives from within or outside without the school district. It Each party will designate a negotiating team, with one member designated as “chief negotiator”. In the event that a member o f either negotiating team is recognized unable to be present for a meeting, that unit may temporarily substitute another negotiator so that the negotiating sessions may continue. Each negotiating team shall be free to have a consultant or consultants present at any or all meetings. Any consultant used by either party shall be responsible to both parties as to authenticity and sources of information presented. Any expense for said consultant or consultants will be solely the responsibility of the party utilizing their services. D. Although no final Agreement between the parties may agreement can be executed without ratification by the Board Association and the Association. The Board in a legally constituted meeting, the parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all the necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and concessions reach compromises in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. When the negotiators have reached mutual agreement on a total proposal, a joint report shall be prepared and signed by both negotiating teams and then submitted to the Association and the Board for ratification. The parties hereby negotiators will recommend to their respective bodies the ratification of the total proposal in its mutually agreed upon written form. F. The Board and the Association agree that their Teams to use mutually agreed upon facilities for the purpose of conducting negotiations. Any expense involved in using a facility for negotiations or any other costs arising out of negotiations will be shared equally between the Board and the Association. G. The negotiating teams will establish a mutually acceptable series of meetings for the purpose of negotiations. The time, date and place of each meeting will be agreed upon at the conclusion of the prior meeting or before, along with the agenda for the meeting. Once a meeting has been established it can only be rescheduled, or the agenda modified by the agreement of both of the chief negotiators. H. Once written procedures and/or guidelines for negotiations have been established, they shall meet at least quarterly during be adhered to by both negotiating teams unless mutual agreement is reached to alter them. In this case, the school year to change will be attached in writing and initialed by each chief negotiator. I. The primary avenue of communication for the negotiating teams will exist between the chief negotiators, X. Each chief negotiator will attempt to resolve problemsinsure that the other will have ample time to discuss and react to any recommendations and/or conclusions. K. Both negotiating teams agree to maintain the confidential nature of the negotiating sessions to the best of their ability. The topics for It is recognized that communication between the negotiators and their respective parties is an absolute necessity, but it should be restricted to these meetings shall bodies only. No press or public releases will be established made by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted either negotiating team, except by mutual agreement. F. Prior L. The negotiating teams agree to cooperate in furnishing data and needed material for the establishment purpose of any new position negotiations and will be willing to provide the sources of these data presented along with the data. X. Proposals may be submitted by either party and, in the bargaining unitcase of disagreement, the Employer second party shall notify the Association of such offer a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the positionwritten counter proposal. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing The negotiations on any item having a financial impact will be considered as part of the decision to establish total cost of the position precludes such a meeting, agreement; thus all agreements involving cost are tentative until the Employer shall meet with total financial impact of all aspects of the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should proposals can be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beevaluated by both negotiating teams. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days Representatives of the Board and the Association’s bargaining committee may meet on the last working Tuesday of each month for the purpose of reviewing the administration of the contract and to resolve problems that may arise. These meetings are not intended to bypass the grievance procedure. Each party will submit to the other, on or before the Friday prior to the expiration meeting, an agenda covering what they wish to discuss. All meetings between the parties will regularly be scheduled to take place as promptly as possible at times when the teachers involved are free from assigned responsibilities, unless otherwise mutually agreed. Should such a meeting result in a mutually acceptable amendment of this Agreementthe agreement, the amendment shall be subject to ratification by the Board and the Association, provided that the bargaining committee shall be empowered to effect temporary accommodations to resolve special problems. B. Prior to April 15th of the year in which the contract terminates, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementshall initiate negotiations. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board and the Associationparty. The parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed vested with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations. Both parties agree to submit the final agreement for ratification to their appropriate governing bodies on the same calendar date. After ratification by both parties, subject only their representatives shall attach their signature to such ultimate the ratified agreement within 24 hours of ratification. There shall be three signed copies of the ratified agreement for purposes of record: one retained by the Board, one by the Association, and one by the superintendent. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the State Labor Mediation Board or take any other lawful measure it may deem appropriate. D. Members E. This agreement shall constitute the full and complete commitment between both parties and may be altered, changed, added to, deleted from, or modified as set forth in Article 21, Section A. F. Any individual contract between the Board and an individual teacher heretofore executed shall be subject to and consistent with the terms and conditions of this agreement. Any individual contract hereafter executed shall be expressly made subject to and consistent with the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretoterms of this or subsequent agreements to be executed by the parties. This agreement, who are employees of the Employerduring its duration, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual controlling, if an individual contract contains any language inconsistent with this agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unitG. This agreement shall supersede all previous agreements, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated actionverbal or written, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing or based on alleged past practices of the decision Board or the Association, which shall be contrary to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet or inconsistent with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beits terms. G. By mutual consent of both parties H. If any section provisions of this agreement may or any application of the agreement to any employee or group of employees shall be reopenedfound contrary to law, such provision or application shall not be deemed valid and subsisting, except to the extent permitted by law, but all other provisions or applications shall continue in full force and effect.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty ninety (6090) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms terms, and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. . In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection of the negotiating representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school districtSchool District. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by the Board Employer and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power and authority to make proposals and concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. ratification If the parties fail to reach an agreement Agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. . Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants theretobargaining team, who are employees of the EmployerBoard, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary and benefits when meetings of the two negotiating teams are scheduled mutually agree to hold negotiations during their normal working hours. E. . Problem Solving Team: The parties hereby agree that their Teams the respective bargaining teams for the Employer and the AAEA/P shall meet at least quarterly no less than four times during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these the meetings shall be established by the group leaders at an agenda planning session for the first meeting, and at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possibleregular meetings for the following meetings thereafter. The agenda will be distributed at least one week before the meetings. Topics will remain on may be added to or deleted from the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior agenda with the consent of the participants. Should any such meeting result in a mutually acceptable amendment to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unitagreement, the Employer amendment shall notify be subject to ratification; provided that the negotiating teams shall be empowered to effect temporary accommodations to resolve special problems. The spring meeting will be devoted to reclassification issues. Additional time will be allocated as needed. Objective criteria for reclassification of members will be mutually determined prior to the reclassification meeting. Reclassification of a position shall be subject to ratification. An employee who wants his/her position to be reclassified shall provide the Association President with a written request for reclassification. The request will include rationale to support the reclassification. An administrator who wants a position he/she supervises to be reclassified shall provide a written request for reclassification to the Deputy Superintendent General Counsel or Designee. The request will include a rationale to support the reclassification. The President of such a contemplated action, the Association and meet the Deputy Superintendent General Counsel or Designee will determine if the position is eligible for reclassification. All requests for reclassification must be received by the end of the first semester. The determination to reclassify or not rests exclusively with the Association committee subject to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, ratification by the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.and AAEA/P.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, It is contemplated that terms and conditions of employment provided in this Agreement shall remain in effect until altered by mutual agreement in writing between the parties. Nevertheless, because of employees the special nature of the public educational process, it is likewise recognized that matters may from time to time arise of vital mutual concern of the parties which have not been fully or adequately negotiated between them. It is in the public interest that the opportunity for mutual discussion of such matters be provided. The parties accordingly undertake to cooperate in arranging meetings, selecting representatives for discussion, furnishing necessary information and otherwise constructively considering and resolving any such matters. B. Not later than April 1 of the calendar year in which this Agreement expires, the Board agrees to negotiate with the Association over a successor agreement in accordance with the procedure set forth herein in a good-faith effort to reach agreement concerning teachers' salaries and all other conditions of their employment. Such negotiation may include, but not be limited to, the subjects covered by this AgreementAgreement and any other matters mutually agreed to be negotiable by the parties. Any agreement so negotiated will apply to all teachers and will be reduced to writing and signed by the Board and the Association. B. In C. Neither party in any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that While no final Agreement between the parties may agreement shall be executed without ratification by the Board Association and the Association. The Board, the parties mutually pledge that their representatives selected by each shall will be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiations, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. D. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsnegotiation, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission or take any other lawful measures it may deem appropriate. D. Members X. Xxxxx agrees that whenever the Association and the Board mutually agree to engage in contract negotiations during the school day, representatives of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall Association will be released relieved from their normal all regular duties without loss of salary when meetings pay in order to permit their participation in such meetings; provided, however, that the Association shall advise the Board, before such mutual agreement, of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursmaximum number of teachers to be so involved. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Professional Negotiation Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least Upon ratification of the Master Agreement, the Association shall not bring up matters for negotiation to the Board and the Board will not bring up matters to the Association except by written mutual consent and as provided in Sections B and L of this ARTICLE and ARTICLE XIV, Section C. B. Within one hundred twenty (120) days, but not less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement, and upon written notice by the Association, the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementsuccessor agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleARTICLE, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating or bargaining representatives of the other party party, and each party may select its six (6) representatives and two (2) alternates from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by both parties, but the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals proposals, consider proposals, and make concessions in the course of negotiationsnegotiations or bargaining, subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiations, either D. Either party may at any time invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendedmediation machinery of the Michigan Employment Relations Commission. D. Members of E. All negotiation meetings will be held in a room(s) mutually agreed upon by the chief negotiators for the Board and Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, . F. All negotiation meetings will be closed to all persons who are employees not duly appointed representatives or alternates under this ARTICLE. Each team, with as much notice as possible may bring in consultants for the purpose of aiding in the Employernegotiation of specific proposals. G. All negotiation meetings will be set as to time, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings duration and agenda by mutual agreement of the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hourschief negotiators. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings H. There shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted no release of information concerning opposition proposals and/or tentative agreements, except by mutual agreement, and except to acquire technical information relative to specific proposals, and except that the chief negotiator for the Board may brief the Board and the chief negotiator for the Association may brief the members of the Association relative to progress in negotiations. However, should the parties reach impasse, this rule shall cease to operate with respect to tentative agreements and proposals on the table at that time. F. Prior I. All agreements shall be tentative pending final agreement on an entire tentative contract by the negotiating representatives for both sides. J. Each team shall have on the table at all times a set of proposals, which if agreed to by the establishment other team along with all tentative contract agreements in effect, shall constitute an entire tentative contract. K. Notwithstanding the expiration of any new position this Agreement, the negotiation procedures outlined in this ARTICLE shall be in effect until a successor agreement is negotiated and ratified. 2003 - 2010 Level Paid Days Weeks Worked Position A 220 44 Middle School Assistant Principal 225 45 Assistant Director of Community Education 225 45 Director, Vocational Education 225 45 Asst. Director of Curriculum and Instruction B 225 45 Associate High School Principal 220 44 Elementary Principal 225 225 45 45 Associate Director, Developmental Learning Program Director, Secondary Special Needs 225 45 Director, Federal Projects and Research C 230 46 Director of Community Education 225 45 Middle School Principal 225 225 45 45 Director, Developmental Learning Program Director of Student Services D 230 46 High School Principal 230 46 Director of Curriculum and Instruction 230 46 Director of Special Services 230 46 Director of Employee Benefits and Transportation Operations Each administrator shall have group term life insurance coverage in an amount equal to three (3) times his/her annual contractual salary and group term dependent life insurance coverage as listed below. The premiums for such insurances shall be paid by each administrator through payroll deduction semi-annually. At the same time, the Board shall reimburse each administrator for such semi-annual premium payment as additional salary. Lives of dependent children - $10,000 each child 14 days to 19 years old (extended to 23 years if full-time college student) Life of spouse $10,000 Hospitalization and Major Medical Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses and/or Dependent Children Effective July 1, 2007 the Community Blue 1 PPO with a $10/$20 prescription coverage rider. Qualifying Period: Accident - exhaustion of accumulated sick leave Sickness - 7 work days or the exhaustion of accumulated sick leave, whichever occurs last Worker's Compensation - after forty (40) weeks Benefit: 66 2/3% of monthly salary not to exceed maximum of $6,000. Including survivor benefit. Maximum Benefit Period: Accident - Age 65 Sickness - Age 65 Type of coverage - 24 hour Integration with other income benefits: 1. Worker's Compensation 2. Michigan Public School Employees' Retirement Fund 3. Social Security - Family 4. Any employer-sponsored disability or retirement plan Dental Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses, and/or Dependent Children Administrators who have dual dental insurance coverage as a consequence of their spouse's employment either with the Board or elsewhere shall receive Blue Cross 50-50-50 coverage. Dental Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses, and/or Dependent Children - Continued The coverage will be as follows: Blue Cross Dental CR-RC-10-10 MBL $1,500 OS-10 MBL 2500 Class I 100% Oral Examinations, X-rays, Flouride Treatments, Cleanings, Emergency First Aid Treatment Class II 90% Restorative, Extractions, Root Canals, Etc. Class III 90% Dentures, Bridges Class IV 100% Orthodontic Rider - $2,500 lifetime benefit Vision Insurance Coverage for Administrators, Dependent Spouses, and/or Dependent Children The Board shall provide a group vision insurance program with the following annual benefits per administrators, dependent spouses, or dependent child (each) Benefits Plan II Examination 100% of reasonable & customary Single Vision Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Bi-focal Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Tri-focal Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Lenticular Lenses 100% of reasonable & customary Frames 100% of reasonable & customary Contact Lenses $40.00 per lens. 100% of customary and reasonable charges is paid if visual acuity of the patient is not correctable to 20/70 in the bargaining unitbetter eye with conventional lenses, the Employer shall notify the Association but can be corrected to 20/70. An examination, frame and one pair of such corrective lenses (including prescription sunglasses, photogray lenses, or contact lenses) will be provided once in a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload 12-month plan year for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing each eligible member of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meetingfamily. Eligible bargaining unit members not electing health insurance will receive $100 per month ($1,200 per year), the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period in lieu of time to determine what a reasonable workload might behealth insurance. G. By mutual consent NOTES: 1. Administrators on approved leave may continue to carry the same coverage by paying group rates. Payments to begin within thirty (30) days from beginning of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopenedleave.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Contract Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least X. Xxxxxx the Board or OAPSE may initiate negotiations by serving written notice to the Superintendent on behalf of the Board, or the OAPSE President on behalf of the Union, not more than ninety (90) days nor less than sixty (60) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement. The party initiating negotiations will notify SERB with a copy of the existing Agreement (unless one has been previously provided), copying the parties will begin negotiations for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions of employment of employees covered by this Agreementother party with such communication. B. In any negotiations described in this article, neither party shall have control over the selection The first negotiating session will be held within fifteen (15) days of the negotiating representatives date on which the notice to negotiate was filed by either party. At the first session and before proposals are exchanged the participants shall establish the guidelines of procedure and agenda under which the other party meetings will be governed during that term of negotiations. Once proposals have been exchanged, and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that an agenda set, no final Agreement between the parties new items may be executed without ratification added by either party except through mutual agreement. C. During negotiations, the Board and the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each shall be clothed with necessary power OAPSE will present relevant data, exchange points of view and authority to make proposals and concessions counter proposals. All public records will be made available to OAPSE upon reasonable request, in writing, during normal business hours. OAPSE will make available to the Board negotiators any information or documents which are intended for release to parties other than a member, a Union committee, or other general membership of the Union. D. The spokesperson of either side may caucus his/her team for independent discussion at any time. Caucuses will not exceed thirty (30) minutes unless mutually agreed. E. Good faith requires that the Board and OAPSE be willing to react to each other's proposals in the course same fashion as the proposals are submitted by either party. If a proposal is unacceptable to one of the parties, that party is obligated to give its reasons. Neither party shall be compelled to agree to a proposal; nor is either party required to make concession. F. During negotiations, subject only items tentatively agreed shall be reduced to such ultimate ratificationwriting and initialed by representatives of each negotiating team and set aside. No item shall be finally agreed to by the respective negotiating teams until all items have been agreed to. C. X. Every effort will be made to conclude negotiations forty (40) days prior to the expiration of this Agreement. If the parties fail to reach an agreement in any such negotiationsnegotiations have not been concluded by that time, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amendeddeclare impasse. D. Members H. If either party declares impasse, the parties shall request that Federal Mediation and Conciliation Services (FMCS) appoint a federal mediator for the purpose of assisting the parties. I. Negotiating sessions between the Board and OAPSE shall be closed to the press and the public. During each negotiating session, the total number of persons representing OAPSE shall not exceed four (4) members and one (1) OAPSE representative; the Board team shall not exceed five (5) in number. Each party shall have the right to designate two (2) alternates. The names of the Association’s negotiating Board and OAPSE team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, members and alternates shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of exchanged prior to the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hoursfirst negotiation session. E. X. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during mutually agreed dispute settlement procedure herein supersedes the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved or until deleted by mutual agreementprocedure set forth in ORC Chapter 4117. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, and meet with the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period of time to determine what a reasonable workload might be. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Collective Bargaining Agreement

NEGOTIATION PROCEDURES. A. At least sixty (60) days prior Upon mutual agreement, the parties may confer during the term of this contract for the purpose of discussing matters of common concern. The parties shall cooperate in scheduling such meetings at mutually convenient times. B. The parties acknowledge that during the negotiations which resulted in this Agreement, each had the unlimited right and opportunity to make demands and proposals with respect or matter not removed by law from the expiration area of collective and that the understandings and agreements arrived at by the parties after the exercise of that right and opportunity are set forth in this Agreement. Therefore, the Board and the Association, for the life of this Agreement, each voluntarily and unqualifiedly waive the right and each agrees that the other shall not be obligated to bargain collectively with respect to any subject or matter not specifically referred to or covered in this Agreement. However, the parties will begin negotiations shall not be precluded from mutually and voluntarily agreeing to reopen any provision of this contract for a new Agreement covering wages, hours, terms and conditions re-negotiation during the term of employment of employees covered by this Agreement. B. C. In any negotiations described in this articleby the parties, neither party shall have any control over the selection of the negotiating negotiators or bargaining representatives of the other party and each party may select its representatives from within or outside the school district. It is recognized that no final Agreement agreement between the parties may be executed without ratification by a majority of the Board of Education and by the membership of the Association. The parties mutually pledge that representatives selected by each them shall be clothed with all necessary power and authority to make proposals, consider proposals and make concessions in the course of negotiations, negotiations or bargaining subject only to such ultimate ratification. C. If D. There are no understandings or agreements or past practices which are binding on either the parties fail District or the Association other than the written agreement enumerated or referred to reach an in this Agreement. No further agreement in any such negotiations, either party may invoke the procedures established under Public Act 379 as amended. D. Members of the Association’s negotiating team and/or consultants thereto, who are employees of the Employer, shall be released from their normal duties without loss of salary when meetings of binding on either the two negotiating teams are scheduled during their normal working hours. E. The parties hereby agree that their Teams shall meet at least quarterly during the school year to attempt to resolve problems. The topics for these meetings shall be established by the group at the previous quarter’s meeting whenever possible. Topics will remain on the agendas until resolved District or until deleted by mutual agreement. F. Prior to the establishment of any new position in the bargaining unit, the Employer shall notify the Association of such a contemplated action, until it has been placed in writing and meet with signed by both the Association to negotiate workload for the position. This provision does not preclude the Employer’s ability to create District and post positions. If the timing of the decision to establish the position precludes such a meeting, the Employer shall meet with the Association as soon either an amendment to this Agreement or as possible. The parties may agree that the position should be allowed to operate without a defined workload for some defined period letter of time to determine what a reasonable workload might beunderstanding executed by both parties. G. By mutual consent of both parties any section of this agreement may be reopened.

Appears in 1 contract

Samples: Master Agreement

Draft better contracts in just 5 minutes Get the weekly Law Insider newsletter packed with expert videos, webinars, ebooks, and more!